JP6674438B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  A gaming machine has been proposed in which a blow to a player's hand is performed at a predetermined timing of a game, thereby notifying or notifying that a game will be a big hit (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2003-117085 A

  In a gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, it is desired to enhance the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above situation, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having an improved interest in gaming.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention,
A gaming machine capable of performing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
At least specific effect the volume of (e.g., reach demonstration), an effect that performs the processing of a plurality of stages of volume settable volume setting means (e.g., step 98AKS002 and a second volume greater than the first volume and the first volume A control CPU 120) ;
An air outlet through which wind is output ,
As the blow port, there is a first blow port and a second blow port provided at a position different from the first blow port,
Wind is output from the first blower port at a predetermined air volume at any volume among a plurality of levels of volume set by the volume setting means,
Wind is output from the second air outlet at a different air volume when the specific effect is performed at the first volume and when the specific effect is performed at the second volume (for example, in the process of step 98AKS003). Effect control CPU 120 for setting the air volume corresponding to the volume, FIG. 8-3).
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game is improved.
Effect execution means capable of executing at least the specific effect,
Operating means operable by a player,
The effect execution means can execute an operation effect to operate the operation means during execution of the specific effect,
When the operation effect is performed, wind may be output from the first air outlet so as to hit a player operating the operation means.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1),
A blower (for example, a first blower 98AK011, a second blower 98AK012) capable of outputting a wind;
The blower is capable of outputting a different amount of wind when the specific effect is executed at the first volume and when the specific effect is executed at the second volume (for example, FIG. 8C). You may do so.
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2),
The wind can be output with a smaller air volume when the specific effect is executed at the second volume than when the specific effect is executed at the first volume (for example, FIG. 8C). Is also good.
According to such a configuration, the sound volume can be set without hindering the progress of the game.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
The volume setting means may be capable of setting the volume to one of a plurality of levels during the progress of the game (for example, FIG. 8-5).
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game is improved.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (4),
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control for executing the effects shown in FIGS. 8-5 (C) to (E)) for executing a suggestion effect (e.g., a fixed effect) indicating that the game is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player. CPU 120),
When the suggestion effect is executed, the wind may be output at a predetermined air volume (for example, air volume 4) regardless of the volume set by the volume setting means.
According to such a configuration, an unexpected effect can be performed, and the interest of the game is improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5),
An operation means (for example, a stick controller 31A) that can be operated by a player;
The wind may be output to the player when the player operates the operation means (for example, the wind may be output from the first blower opening 98AK001 at the time of the determined effect of operating the stick controller 31A).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is enhanced.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6),
A demonstration effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing a demonstration effect as shown in FIG. 8-7) capable of executing a demonstration effect when the game is not in progress;
The volume setting means can set the volume to one of a plurality of levels (for example, silence) when the demonstration effect is being executed,
When the sound volume is set during the demonstration, the wind is output in a different output mode according to the set sound volume (for example, FIG. 8-7 (C)).
Except when the demonstration is being performed and the volume is set, the wind output mode is common (for example, no wind) regardless of the volume set by the volume setting means. Is also good.
According to such a configuration, since the air volume changes according to the change in the volume, it is easy to grasp the setting status of the volume.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7),
It is possible to perform a game and control to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot playing state) which is advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage for the player is different based on the set value;
Setting control means (for example, CPU 103 executing steps Sa6 and Sa12) capable of controlling a change permission state for permitting change of the set value by the setting means with the start of power supply;
Effect-adjustment detecting means (for example, an output-amount changeover switch 71AK001 or the like) capable of detecting an operation relating to the adjustment of the output amount of the effect;
Output amount control means for controlling the output amount of the effect to any one of a plurality of stages based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detecting means (for example, the output switching process at the start of step 71AKS013 or the output change process in progress of step 71AKS019). Effect control CPU 120 to be executed), and
Limiting means for limiting the execution of the control by the output amount control means regardless of the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detecting means when the change is permitted, (for example, step AKS012 is executed as the power-on command processing of step 71AKS012). And the effect control CPU 120 for executing processing).
According to such a configuration, the execution of the control by the output amount control means is restricted when the change is permitted, so that it is possible to prevent a trouble in the work of changing the set value.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of effect control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the characteristic part 98AK. It is a block diagram showing various control boards mounted on the pachinko gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 98AK. It is a figure which shows the air volume set with respect to the sound volume concerning the characteristic part 98AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the output amount setting process concerning the characteristic part 98AK. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation concerning feature part 98AK. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation concerning feature part 98AK. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation concerning feature part 98AK. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the characteristic part 99AK. It is a block diagram showing various control boards mounted on the pachinko gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 99AK. It is a figure showing an example of operation of the 1st movable object concerning feature part 99AK. It is a figure showing functional composition of a movable body concerning characteristic part 99AK. It is a figure which shows the operation timing and operation content of the movable body which concerns on the characteristic part 99AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the movable body abnormality determination processing concerning the characteristic part 99AK. FIG. 9 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like according to another characteristic portion. It is a rear view showing a pachinko gaming machine according to another characteristic portion. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the effect control command concerning other characteristic parts. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value used as the random number for games which concerns on another characteristic part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a variation pattern according to another characteristic portion. It is an explanatory view showing a display result judgment table concerning other characteristic parts. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hit type determination table concerning other characteristic parts. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit type which concerns on another characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table concerning other characteristic parts. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure showing the data holding area for game control concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure showing arrangement and display contents of a display monitor concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure showing the storage area which memorizes the number of prize balls concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure showing a memory map concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure showing the built-in RAM area concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure showing an example of control of a display in a display monitor concerning other characteristic parts. FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating an example of execution of buffer update according to another characteristic part. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main process according to another characteristic unit. It is a figure showing the display mode of the display monitor concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure showing the display mode of the display monitor concerning other characteristic parts. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a display monitor in a modification example according to another characteristic portion. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a display monitor in a modification example according to another characteristic portion. It is a rear perspective view showing a pachinko gaming machine in a modified example according to another characteristic portion. It is a rear surface perspective view showing the state where the frame for gaming machines in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part was opened. It is a figure showing the security cover in the modification concerning other characteristics. It is a figure showing the security cover in the modification concerning other characteristics. It is a figure showing an example of state control concerning other characteristic parts. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing concerning other characteristic parts. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of power supply concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure showing the priority of effect control concerning other characteristic parts. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the production control main processing in the modification concerning other characteristic parts. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting confirmation process in progress in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the output amount change switch concerning characteristic part 71AK. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating initial setting control related to a characteristic unit 71AK. It is a figure showing the example of execution of information concerning feature part 71AK. It is a figure showing the example of a display concerning feature part 71AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing concerning feature part 71AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the output switching process at the start which concerns on the characteristic part 71AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of an in-progress output change processing concerning feature part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the priority of the effect control in the modification concerning the characteristic part 71AK. It is a figure showing an example of execution of an initial operation concerning characteristic part 72AK. It is a figure showing a control pattern concerning characteristic part 72AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of command processing at the time of power supply concerning feature part 72AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of a power supply in the modification concerning the characteristic part 72AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of command processing at the time of power supply concerning characteristic part 73AK. It is a figure showing the example of a display of the setting confirmation information screen concerning feature part 73AK. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the production control pattern concerning feature part 74AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the production control main processing concerning feature part 74AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of confirmation effect control processing concerning feature part 74AK. It is a timing chart etc. which show the example of control of the confirmation effect concerning characteristic part 74AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of power supply concerning characteristic part 75AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the confirmation effect control process during a setting change concerning the characteristic part 75AK. It is a timing chart etc. which show the example of control of the confirmation effect concerning characteristic part 75AK.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined hitting ball firing device and driven into the game area.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of a special symbol (also called a special figure) as a plurality of kinds of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B for performing are provided. These are each composed of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a numeral indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of a special symbol means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed so as to be variable (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the case of the change of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable display.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as “second special figure game”. In addition, the special symbol display device which performs the variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. On the image display device 5, various effect images are displayed.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern indicating a number or the like). Is variably displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down). (Scroll display of direction and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decoration symbol executed synchronously is also simply referred to as a variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. The hold display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays suspended is also referred to as the number of suspended storages. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved storage number. In addition, the sum of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2, there are provided a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs. Displays the first number of reserved storages, and the second reservation display 25B displays the second number of reserved storages based on the number of lighted LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning port that is always kept in a fixed open state by which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special figure game can be started.

  The variable prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting prize port that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning prize ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in an off state, so that the tip of the movable wing piece is Is in the closed state where the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port (also referred to as the second starting winning port being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning prize ball device 6B is in an open state in which a game ball can enter the second starting winning opening when the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 is on (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special figure game can be started. It should be noted that the variable winning ball device 6B only needs to change between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 which is always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door that is driven to be opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and a special winning opening as a specific area that is changed between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the off state, the special winning opening door closes the special winning opening, and the game ball becomes large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the large winning opening door solenoid 82 is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

  When game balls enter the special winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10, for example.

  A game ball entering each winning port including the general winning port 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area), a normal symbol display 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays a normal symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The normal symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The normal design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal symbol is also called a normal symbol game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a pass gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the passing of the game ball through the passage gate 41, the general-purpose game is executed.

  Above the ordinary symbol display 20, there is provided an ordinary symbol holding display 25 </ b> C. The general-purpose reservation indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored general-purpose reservations, which is the number of general-purpose games for which execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

  On the surface of the game board 2, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails are provided. At the bottom of the game area, there is provided an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning ports.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 for a gaming effect is provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to fire a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball firing device is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball loaned by a predetermined ball rental machine is held so that it can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device (reservation). ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which a prize ball is paid out when the upper plate is full is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, there is provided a player capable of performing a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detecting means for detecting the operation (operation or the like) of the player, but other detecting means may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
A game ball is fired toward a game area by a rotation operation by a player on a hit ball operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the ordinary symbol game using the ordinary symbol display device 20 is started. In the case where the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during a period during the execution of the previous general-purpose game or the like (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general-purpose game based on the passage). The general-purpose game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary symbol game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "a symbol per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol (regular symbol lost symbol) other than the symbol per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol is “regular symbol lost”. When "per day" is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period of time (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  Note that, when the game ball enters (wins) the starting winning opening during a period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during a period in which the game is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state, which will be described later. When the special figure game based on the start winning prize cannot be immediately executed), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, “7”, an actual symbol is different depending on the type of big hit described later) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, the big hit symbol is obtained. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, “2”) different from the above is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “−”) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “losing” is obtained.

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the state is controlled to the small hit game state.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes a timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and a timing of the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaching a predetermined number (for example, nine). It is continued until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which a special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times).

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big winning opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous to the player.

  Note that the "big hit" is set with a big hit type. For example, a plurality of types of opening modes of the special winning opening (the number of rounds and the upper limit period of opening) and a game state after the big hit game state (a normal state, a time saving state, a probable change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared. The type has been set. As the big hit type, a big hit type where many prize balls can be obtained or a big hit type where few or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

  In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hitting game state, the opening mode is the same as the big hitting game state in the case of some of the big hit types (the number of opening of the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same). Etc.) to open the big winning opening. In addition, similarly to the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the “small hit”.

  After the big hit game state is ended, the time may be controlled to a time saving state or a certain change state depending on the big hit type.

  In the time saving state, control (time saving control) for shortening the average special figure fluctuation time (the period during which the special figure is fluctuated) is performed as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average time of fluctuating fluctuating time (period of fluctuating fluctuating figure) is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of "per-figure hit" in the frug drawing game is improved than in the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that allow the game balls to easily enter the second start winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved, and is therefore an advantageous state for the player.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than that in the normal state is executed. The probable change state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because the change efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the state is likely to be a “big hit”.

  The time saving state and the probable change state continue until one of the end conditions such as the execution of the predetermined number of special figure games and the start of the next big hit game state is satisfied first. The condition that the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times is an end condition is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

  The normal state is a game state other than a special state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time-saving state, a probable change state, or the like. The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special map game will be a "big hit", is set in the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when a system reset is performed). This is a state in which the same control is performed as when the processing is not executed).

  The state in which the probable change control is being executed is also referred to as a high-probability state, and the state in which the probable change control is not being executed is referred to as a low-probability state. The state in which the time-saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time-saving control is not executed is called a low base state. By combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the probable change state is a high-precision high-base state, and the normal state is also a low-probability low-base state. The high-accuracy low-base state is also referred to as a high-accuracy low-base state.

  After the small hitting game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the control is continued to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number cut, the game state is naturally changed). Note that the display result of the special figure game does not have to have “small hit”.

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area within a special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when a game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a positively changed state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed in accordance with the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. Note that the effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, a sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a game effect lamp 9 is provided. May be performed by turning on / off the light, operating the movable body 32, or the like.

  In the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 as the effect performed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At the timing when the display result (also called a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game or the second special figure game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative symbols) which is a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also stopped (derived).

  During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end thereof, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that has not been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 forms a part of a jackpot combination described below. Is continued.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a ratio (also referred to as a jackpot reliability or a jackpot expectation) in which a display result (a display result of a special figure game or a display result of a variable display of a decorative pattern) becomes a "big hit" according to the effect mode. A plurality of different reach effects are executed. The reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a fixed decoration pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbol (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of "probable change big hit" which is controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and after the big hit game state is ended, the probable change state is set. In the case of a non-probable variable jackpot (normal jackpot) that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as positive variation symbols, and the even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-positive variable symbols (normal symbols). After the non-probable design has reached the reach mode, a promotion effect that eventually becomes a “probable change” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “small hit”, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, “ 1 35 ”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols forming the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state) and when it is "small hit" , A common fixed decorative design may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode does not become the reach mode, and the non-reach combination fixed decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach loss”) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “non-reach loss”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative design variable display mode becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination (“reach loss”) is displayed as the decorative symbol variable display display result. ) May be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "reach loss").

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the above-mentioned variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effects include a notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display with execution suspended). As the prefetch notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Also, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display, one variable display is made to look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo continuous production may be executed.

  During the big hit game state, a big hit effect is performed to notify the big hit game state. As the large hit production, a production that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion production that indicates that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, a small hitting effect for notifying the small hitting game state is executed. The big hit game in the small hit game state and in some big hit types (a big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state) By performing a common effect in the state and the state, the player may not be able to know whether the current state is the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hitting game state and after the end of the big hitting game state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

  Further, for example, when a special map game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15 and the like as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of holding), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of holding), Game state, small hitting game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, , A random number circuit 104 and an input / output port (I / O) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns to be described later, effect control commands to be described later, data to be referred to when making various determinations to be described later, and various tables) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first reservation). An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second reservation display 25B, the general-purpose reservation display 25C, and the like (solenoid driving signal) is provided.

  The switch circuit 110 detects detection signals (game balls pass or exit) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start-up switch (first start-up switch 22A and second start-up switch 22B), count switch 23). (Such as a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the vehicle enters) and is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the passing or approach of the game ball has been detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a special winning opening door. Transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, the effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12 The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a big hit type)) and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), A game state (for example, start and end of variable display, opening state of a special winning opening, occurrence of a prize, number of storages held, game state), a command for specifying an error occurrence, and the like.

  The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game. (Including various types of notification such as driving of the movable body 32, notification of an error, and notification of restoration of a power failure).

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (this is a process for realizing the above functions of the effect control board 12, and Determination, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal appropriately indicating the operation content). In some cases, the control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 displays an effect image on the image display device 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output a sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal designating a lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

  The audio control board 13 has various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs a sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let it.

  The lamp control board 14 includes various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. I do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the turning on / off of the lamp.

  The sound output, control of turning on / off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or a lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.) are executed by the effect control CPU 120. You may do so.

  The random number circuit 124 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for inputting an effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11 or the like, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port.

  Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the voice control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of the main board 11)
First, main operations of the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, and the like), setting of making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in a work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a process of protecting data in the RAM 102, and the like are performed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (check sum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, various timer states, and the like), but also the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of stopping the power supply, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a restoration process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the recovery processing, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, when the power supply is stopped, the game state is restored, and if the special symbol is being changed, the special symbol change is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing recovery from the power interruption to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, the effect control command to specify the backed-up game state before the power interruption, or the effect control to specify the display result of the running special figure game if the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the time of restoration from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the restoration from the power interruption has been performed or that the restoration from the power interruption is being performed. Screen display to perform The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

  After transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12 after ending the restoration process or the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a register of a CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, a loop process is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process.

  Upon receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether a detection signal has been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of the jackpot, etc.) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, the start information (start It outputs data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.), probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed, etc.) (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random number used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). When the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process at each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special figure game, control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized. See below).

  Subsequent to the special symbol processing, the ordinary symbol processing is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process process every time the timer interrupts, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the general symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), Opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per day" is enabled. The execution of the ordinary symbol game is performed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary symbol reservation display 25C is turned on to display the ordinary symbol reservation number.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out award balls, and the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a command control process (Step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set to be transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process ends.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as a special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of stored holds is executed. When a winning start occurs, a random number for determining a display result (including a big hit type) and a variation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of storages to be held, transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for designating a determination result such as occurrence of a start winning prize, the number of storages to be held, and pre-reading determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of the winning start-up thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to

  After executing the start winning determination processing in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processing in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each of the special symbol process processes (steps S110 to S120), transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 are performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In the special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit", or a big hit type in the case of "big hit" Is determined (prior determination) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (any of a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special figure game is set in accordance with the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1”, and the special special pattern normal processing ends. Note that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed prior to the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special figure game may be established in the order of the winning (also referred to as winning the order).

  When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting processing, any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is used by using a random number value for variation pattern determination based on a result of a predetermined determination as to whether or not the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. And the like are determined. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the variation pattern setting process ends.

  The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (the special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. Is designated (variable display pattern, etc.).

  The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “2”. The special symbol change processing includes a process for setting a special symbol to be changed in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to change. And the like. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol fluctuation reaches the special figure fluctuation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”, and the special symbol fluctuation processing ends.

  The special symbol stop processing in step S113 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop processing, the change of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). The processing for making the setting is included. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When the display result is “losing”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. If the display result is "small hit" or "losing", the game state is updated when the time reduction state or the probable change state is controlled and the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. The big hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process of starting a round in the big hit gaming state and setting a big winning opening to an open state based on a display result of “big hit” or the like. Have been. When opening the special winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, an opening upper limit period in which the special winning opening is opened and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to, for example, the type of the big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, and the big hit opening pre-processing ends.

  The big hit opening processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The processing during the opening of the jackpot is based on a process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the jackpot, and on the basis of the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. For determining whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing such as stopping supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “6”, The processing during the opening of the big hit ends.

  The post-big hit release processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". The post-big hit opening process includes a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the special winning opening is opened has reached a set upper limit number of times, and a process of determining whether or not the number of hits has reached the upper limit number of times. And the like to perform a setting for terminating the process. When the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit execution number, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release processing ends.

  The big hit end processing in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The big hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an ending effect is performed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state, and a change in response to the end of the big hit game state. The processing includes various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the big hit end processing ends.

  The small hit release pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. The small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting the large winning opening to the open state in the small hitting game state based on the display result being “small hit”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit opening processing in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". The processing during opening of the small hits includes processing for measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the special winning opening and timing for returning the large winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes a process of determining whether or not the event has occurred. When the big winning port is returned to the closed state and the timing of ending the small hitting game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”, and the small hit opening processing ends.

  The small hit end processing in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed is performed. Here, when the small hitting game state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hitting gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operation of effect control board 12)
Next, main operations of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12 The register setting of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit) is performed. Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed, and the process stands by.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt inhibition. However, if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt inhibit state is used, an interrupt is generated. It is desirable to issue a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In the command reception interrupt processing, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt processing.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read out. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the effect control command that has been read is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. For example, it turns on a provided reception flag. When the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

  After executing the command analysis processing in step S75, an effect control process processing is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, a display operation of an effect image in a display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation of a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative illuminant such as a decoration LED, a movable body 32 The control for operating various effect devices, such as the driving operation of the device, is performed. In addition, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed on the control content of the rendering operation using the various rendering devices in accordance with the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

  Following the effect control process of step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process process illustrated in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing a look-ahead notice effect are performed based on a start control effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the number of held memories specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether to start variable display of a decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether a command for designating the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11 or the like. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process ends.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In the variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the decorative design variable display (fixed decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, an effect control pattern (a set of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, updates the value of the effect process flag to “2”, and ends the variable display start setting process. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol according to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5 by instructing the display control unit 123. Driving the movable body 32, outputting a voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and transmitting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects control such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED by the output is performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. After performing such an effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating stop display of the fixed decorative symbol from the main board 11 is received. In response to, for example, the fixed decoration symbol which is the display result of the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

  The wait process per special figure in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the waiting process per special figure, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to “6”. To ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the small hit effect effect processing. Also, if the reception wait time of the command has elapsed without receiving a command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special map game is “losing”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the wait process per special figure ends.

  The small hit production process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is “4”. In the small hit effect production process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. . In addition, in the small hit effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating the end of the small hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit production process ends.

  The small hit end effect processing in step S175 is processing executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In the small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and performs various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set contents. Execute Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect process ends.

  The big hit production process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is “6”. In this big hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set contents. In the big hit middle rendering process, the value of the rendering control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending rendering process in response to, for example, receiving a command designating the big hit gaming state from the main board 11. 7 ", and ends the big hit production process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In the ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and performs various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the set contents. Execute. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of the basic description)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, the gaming media is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the sign indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When the symbols are stopped according to the operation of the stop button and the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine in which one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.) are mounted.

  The programs and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium. It may be in a form of being distributed by being installed in a storage device included in the storage device. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, programs and data for implementing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  The game can be executed not only by installing a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the program may be directly executed using hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  In this specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, and “differentiate”) is that one of the ratios is “0%”. May be included. For example, it may include that one is a ratio of “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 98AK)
Next, the characteristic portion 98AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8A is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the characteristic portion 98AK. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 98AK, a first air outlet 98AK001 is provided at a lower position of the gaming machine frame 3 (the back side of the stick controller 31A), and a second air blower is provided at an upper position of the gaming machine frame 3. A mouth 98AK002 is provided. From the first blower port 98AK001 and the second blower port 98AK002, wind can be output toward the player.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the characteristic portion 98AK has a first blower 98AK011 for outputting wind from the first blower port 98AK001 and a second blower 98AK002 for outputting wind from the second blower port 98AK002. And a second blower 98AK012. The first blower 98AK011 and the second blower 98AK012 are connected to the effect control board 12, and blow air at a predetermined air volume based on a control signal from the effect control board 12.

  Each of the first blower 98AK011 and the second blower 98AK012 is configured by a motor, a fan, or the like, and can generate a predetermined amount of wind in response to a control signal from the effect control board 12. The wind generated by the first blower 98AK011 is output from the first blower 98AK001, and the wind generated by the second blower 98AK012 is output from the second blower 98AK002. The first blower 98AK011 and the second blower 98AK012 are not limited to those configured with a motor, a fan, or the like, and at least one of them may blow air using a pump or compressed air (a cylinder). It may generate wind with sound or vibration. For example, wind (vibration) may be generated when sound is output from a bass reflex speaker or a wool.

  In this embodiment, the wind is output from the first air outlet 98AK001 and / or the second air outlet 98AK002 in a predetermined case such as during execution of a specific effect such as a reach effect. In this embodiment, when the player performs a predetermined operation, the volume output from the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be set to four levels. The air volume of the air output from the second air outlet 98AK002 is variable, and four levels of air volume are provided as shown in FIG. 8C. The second blower 98AK012 changes the amount of rotation of a motor (fan), thereby changing the amount of air output from the second blower port 98AK002.

  In this embodiment, as an example, as shown in FIG. 8C, the air volume of the wind output from the second air outlet 98AK002 is set to an air volume inversely proportional to the set volume. That is, as the volume output from the pachinko gaming machine 1 increases, the volume of the output wind decreases, and as the volume output from the pachinko gaming machine 1 decreases, the volume of the output wind increases. ing. By doing so, the sound can be complemented by the wind, and the wind can be complemented by the sound, so that the output amounts of the two can be balanced. The number of steps of the volume and the air volume is not limited to four, and may be three or less or five or more. Further, the air volume (correspondence relationship between the volume and the air volume) set by the volume is not limited to the example illustrated in FIG. 8C.

  FIG. 8D is a flowchart illustrating an example of an output amount setting process performed by the effect control CPU 120. The output amount setting process is a process for monitoring the presence or absence of a volume change operation by the player and, when there is a volume change operation, setting a volume corresponding to the operation content and setting an air volume corresponding to the volume. . The output amount setting process may be executed for each timer interrupt, for example, in the effect control process process (after step S161). That is, the output amount setting process may be performed so that the presence or absence of the volume setting operation by the player can be constantly monitored.

  In the output amount setting process shown in FIG. 8D, first, effect CPU 120 determines whether or not a volume change operation has been performed (step 98AKS001). The volume change operation may be an arbitrary operation. For example, the volume may be raised or lowered by operating the stick controller 31A left or right except during an effect using the stick controller 31A. Alternatively, a predetermined operation may be performed on the operation unit such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B to call up the menu screen and set the volume. If the volume change operation has not been performed (step 98AKS001; No), the output amount setting process ends.

  When the volume change operation is performed (step 98AKS001; Yes), the changed volume is set (step 98AKS002). In step 98AKS002, the changed volume may be stored (set) in, for example, a volume storage area provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 for storing the currently set volume. When sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the sound volume storage area is referred to, and control is performed so that the sound is output at the set sound volume.

  Subsequently, the air volume corresponding to the changed volume is set (step 98AKS003). In step 98AKS003, the air volume corresponding to the changed volume may be stored (set) in the air volume storage area provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 for storing the currently set air volume. When the wind is output from the second air outlet 98AK002, the air volume storage area is referred to and control is performed so that the wind is output at the set air volume.

  Thereafter, in order to allow the player to confirm the changed volume, a predetermined change confirmation sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the changed volume (step 98AKS004). At the same time, in order to allow the player to check the changed air volume, the air is output from the second air outlet 98AK002 with the changed air volume (step 98AKS005). Then, the output amount setting process ends. In step 98AKS005, the air may be output from the first air outlet 98AK001 with the changed air volume.

  Note that the output of the change confirmation sound may be omitted when another sound (such as a production sound) is being output, or may be output by being superimposed on the other sound.

(Example of production operation of the characteristic part 98AK)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation of the characteristic portion 98AK will be described. The following production operation is executed by the production control CPU 120 executing the production control process based on the production control command transmitted from the main board 11. FIG. 8-5 is an example of an effect operation when a super-reach reach effect is executed and a big hit occurs. FIG. 8-5 (A) shows that the decorative symbol indicating the numeral 7 in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5 is stopped and is in the reach mode. ing.

  After that, when developing into super reach, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), an image indicating super reach is displayed on the image display device 5, and the ornamental design is reduced and displayed in the upper left portion. . At this time, the sound “super reach” is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the wind is output from the second air outlet 98AK002 to the player. It is reported that the super reach has been achieved by such an effect. At this time, the output of the sound and the output of the wind do not have to be simultaneous. For example, the wind may be output a predetermined time after the sound is output, for example, one second or the like. By doing so, the wind is output after the super-reach is notified by voice, so that a surprising effect can be executed. Although the volume and the air volume are not shown in the example shown in FIG. 8-5, in the reach effect of the super reach shown in FIG. 8-5, for example, the air volume corresponding to the set volume (the air volume 1, The wind may be output with a wind volume of 4 when the set volume is 4).

  Thereafter, a super-reach reach effect (for example, a battle effect in which the character confronts) is executed, and when the timing of deriving and displaying the variable display result approaches, the stick controller 31A is imitated as shown in FIG. 8-5 (C). The effect image 98AK031U and the character “BATTLE !!” indicating that the battle effect is settled are displayed on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. 8D, the effect image 98AK031U imitating the stick controller 31A. Is enlarged, the characters "Close!" Are displayed on the image display device 5, and the sound of "Close" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this manner, the operation promoting effect for prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A is executed.

  Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (E), the decorative patterns indicating the number 7 are aligned, and the character image indicating that the battle effect has been won is displayed. Is displayed. At this time, the wind is output from the first air outlet 98AK001 to the player. Since the first air outlet 98AK001 is provided on the back side of the stick controller 31A, the wind output from the first air outlet 98AK001 hits the hand of the player who operated the stick controller 31A. As described above, in the present embodiment, in addition to the display on the image display device 5, by outputting the wind to the player, it is notified that a big hit has occurred. In this way, at the end timing of the reach effect, the effect for notifying the variable display result is determined, and is also referred to as an effect (suggesting effect indicating that the control is performed in an advantageous state). The air volume of the air output from the first air outlet 98AK001 is constant (for example, air volume 4) regardless of the setting. The air volume of the air output from the first air outlet 98AK001 may also be changed according to the set volume.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8F, the decorative symbol indicating the number 7 is displayed in a large size, and the variable display result of the big hit is derived and displayed. And it is controlled to a big hit game state.

  In the effect operation example shown in FIG. 8-5, a case in which a big hit is finally shown is shown. However, in a case in which a final loss is made, a decorative pattern of a combination of the losses in the stage of FIG. 8-5 (E). Is displayed, and a character image indicating that the character has been defeated in the battle effect is displayed. In this case, no wind is output from the first air outlet 98AK001. Further, if the stick controller 31A is not operated after the operation promoting effect for prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A is executed, the result of the battle effect is notified as time elapses, and the variable display result is derived and displayed. When the result of the battle effect is notified with the passage of time, the wind may not be output from the first blower opening 98AK001 even in the case of a big hit.

  Next, another effect operation example of the characteristic portion 98AK will be described. FIG. 8-6 is an example of the effect operation when the reach effect of the horror super reach is executed and the volume is changed during the reach effect. When a horror super reach reach effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), the character "Horror reach!" Is displayed on the image display device 5, and the decorative design is reduced to the upper left portion. Is displayed. At this time, the sound of “horror reach” is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the wind is output from the second air outlet 98AK002 to the player. Here, it is assumed that the volume is set to 4, which is the maximum value, and the air volume is set to 1. Therefore, the sound of “horror reach” is output at the maximum volume.

  For example, when the player does not like to perform the horror reach at the maximum volume, such as when the player is not good at performing the horror system, the operation of lowering the volume by operating the stick controller 31A is performed. can do. For example, when an operation of lowering the volume from 4 to 1 is performed, the display indicating the volume on the image display device 5 changes from 4 to 1 and the speakers 8L and 8R, as shown in FIGS. The sound (BGM, etc.) of the reach effect of “horror reach” is output at the volume 1 after the change, and the wind is output at the air volume of 4 from the second air outlet 98AK002.

  By doing so, it is possible to secure a reduction in the effect of the effect due to the decrease in the volume by increasing the output amount of the wind, and it is possible to prevent an extreme decrease in the effect of the effect. Also, despite the lowering of the sound volume, an unexpected effect can be executed by increasing the output amount of the wind. In addition, in FIG. 8C, a change confirmation sound may be output in addition to the output of the effect sound (BGM or the like) of the reach effect.

  FIG. 8-7 is an example of a production operation when a volume change operation is performed during the demonstration production. FIG. 8A shows that a predetermined demonstration effect is being executed on the image display device 5. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8A, during the demonstration, regardless of the set volume and air volume, there is no sound and no wind is output. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the audio and wind from being output during the demonstration effect, which would bother the user and increase the power consumption. During the demonstration, the volume and the air volume may be set to predetermined values (for example, low values) regardless of the set volume and the air volume.

  At this time, when the set volume is 4 and an operation of lowering the volume from 4 to 1 is performed, the display indicating the volume on the image display device 5 is displayed as shown in FIGS. 8-7 (B) and (C). From 4 to 1, the sound of “pin” as the change confirmation sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the changed volume 1 and the wind is changed from the second air outlet 98AK002 at the changed air flow 4. Is output.

  Thus, even during the demonstration of silence and no wind, if there is a volume change operation, the change confirmation sound is output at the changed volume 1 and the air volume 4 which is the changed air volume is output. Wind is output. Thereby, the player and the like before the start of the game can grasp the changed volume and air volume.

(Modification of the characteristic portion 98AK)
In this embodiment, an arbitrary volume can be set by a volume change operation of a player or the like, but the volume is determined in advance by the content of the effect, and when a specific effect (for example, a reach effect or a notice effect) is being executed. Alternatively, the wind may be output at an air volume corresponding to the volume in the specific effect (for example, an air volume inversely proportional to the volume).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8C, the air volume of the air output from the second air outlet 98AK002 is set to an air volume inversely proportional to the set volume. Instead, a different air volume may be set depending on the set volume, and for example, the air volume may be set to be proportional to the set volume. By doing so, for example, when the volume is changed, the wind is output with an air volume proportional to the changed volume, so that the changed volume can be easily grasped.

Further, in this embodiment, provided as an output capable blower opening the wind, but the first wind outlet 98AK001 a second wind outlet 98AK002 are provided, may be air blowing port is a single, three or more It may be. In this case, the amount of air output from at least some of the air outlets may be made different depending on the output volume. The installation position of the air outlet may be arbitrary.

  In addition to or instead of setting the air volume according to the set volume, the period from when the sound is output to when the wind is output and the period when the wind is output may be different. .

  In this embodiment, the volume can be changed even while the game is in progress, but when the game is not being performed, such as during a demonstration, the volume can be changed by calling the menu screen. Is also good. Also, by calling such a menu screen, the presence or absence of wind output and the output frequency may be changed. The presence or absence and output frequency of the wind may be changed during the progress of the game.

  Further, when the volume is changed while the wind is being output, the air volume may be changed after a predetermined period has elapsed. For example, after the volume change operation is performed, the setting of the air volume may be changed at the timing of ending the audio output being output or the timing of ending the output of the wind.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 8-5 and 8-6, the wind is output from the second air outlet 98AK002 to the player at the timing of notification of the super reach (report of the reach title). Was. The wind may be output from the second air outlet 98AK002 only when the reach title is notified, or the wind may be output in accordance with the BGM or sound effect during the subsequent reach effect. Further, during a predetermined period during the reach effect (for example, immediately before the determined effect), the wind may not be output from the second air outlet 98AK002, or the air volume may be reduced.

  When a volume change operation is performed, the air volume may be changed after a predetermined period has elapsed, instead of immediately changing the air volume. For example, the period until the air volume is changed may be different between when the volume is increased and when the volume is decreased. If the volume is further changed during a predetermined period after the volume change operation is performed (for example, volume 1 → 2 → 3, etc.), the air volume (for example, air volume 4 → 2, etc.) corresponding to the further changed volume. May be set.

  Further, by providing a lamp inside or near the first blower port 98AK001 and / or the second blower port 98AK002 so that the lamp is turned on at the time of wind output, an effect of notifying that wind is being output is executed. You may. Further, an effect of notifying that wind is being output may be executed by the image display device 5, the existing game effect lamp 9, or the like.

  In the initial operation at the time of turning on the power, the wind may be output from the first blower port 98AK001 and the second blower port 98AK002 in order to check the operation of the wind output. In this case, the wind may be output from the first air outlet 98AK001 and the second air outlet 98AK002 at a constant air volume (for example, a maximum value of 4) irrespective of the set air volume.

  Further, when notifying an error, wind may be output from the first air outlet 98AK001 and / or the second air outlet 98AK002. In this case, the wind may be output from the first air outlet 98AK001 and / or the second air outlet 98AK002 at a constant air volume (for example, a maximum value of 4) irrespective of the set air volume. Further, the air outlet for outputting the wind may be made different depending on the type of error.

  A configuration for enabling control of an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to a player based on the set value, and enabling a set value to be changed based on a predetermined setting change operation, and a set value that is set. May be provided. In this case, when the setting value is being changed (change permitted state), the change operation of the volume or the air volume may be prohibited or restricted. When the operation of changing the set value is performed, if the operation of changing the volume is performed, the set volume or the air volume is not changed and the predetermined volume and the air volume (for example, the maximum value to silence and no wind) are set. Sound and wind may be output. At this time, a warning sound indicating that the change of the volume is restricted may be output. By doing so, it is possible to prevent trouble in changing the set value.

(Explanation of the means related to the characteristic part 98AK)
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic section 98AK is:
A gaming machine capable of performing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Volume control means that can set at least the volume of the specific performance (for example, the reach performance) to a plurality of levels including the first volume and the second volume that is higher than the first volume (for example, performance control that executes the process of step 98AKS002). CPU 120),
It is possible to output a wind with a different air volume when the specific effect is executed at the first volume and when the specific effect is executed at the second volume (for example, the air volume corresponding to the volume in the process of step 98AKS003). Effect control CPU 120 for setting (FIG. 8-3).
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1),
A blower (for example, a first blower 98AK011, a second blower 98AK012) capable of outputting a wind;
The blower is capable of outputting a different amount of wind when the specific effect is executed at the first volume and when the specific effect is executed at the second volume (for example, FIG. 8C). You may do so.
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2),
The wind can be output with a smaller air volume when the specific effect is executed at the second volume than when the specific effect is executed at the first volume (for example, FIG. 8C). Is also good.
According to such a configuration, the sound volume can be set without hindering the progress of the game.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
The volume setting means may be capable of setting the volume to one of a plurality of levels during the progress of the game (for example, FIG. 8-5).
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game is improved.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (4),
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control for executing the effects shown in FIGS. 8-5 (C) to (E)) for executing a suggestion effect (e.g., a fixed effect) indicating that the game is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player. CPU 120),
When the suggestion effect is executed, the wind may be output at a predetermined air volume (for example, air volume 4) regardless of the volume set by the volume setting means.
According to such a configuration, an unexpected effect can be performed, and the interest of the game is improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5),
An operation means (for example, a stick controller 31A) that can be operated by a player;
The wind may be output to the player when the player operates the operation means (for example, the wind may be output from the first blower opening 98AK001 at the time of the determined effect of operating the stick controller 31A).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is enhanced.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6),
A demonstration effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing a demonstration effect as shown in FIG. 8-7) capable of executing a demonstration effect when the game is not in progress;
The volume setting means can set the volume to one of a plurality of levels (for example, silence) when the demonstration effect is being executed,
When the sound volume is set during the demonstration, the wind is output in a different output mode according to the set sound volume (for example, FIG. 8-7 (C)).
Except when the demonstration is being performed and the volume is set, the wind output mode is common (for example, no wind) regardless of the volume set by the volume setting means. Is also good.
According to such a configuration, since the air volume changes according to the change in the volume, it is easy to grasp the setting status of the volume.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7),
It is possible to perform a game and control to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot playing state) which is advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage for the player is different based on the set value;
Setting control means (for example, CPU 103 executing steps Sa6 and Sa12) capable of controlling a change permission state for permitting change of the set value by the setting means with the start of power supply;
Effect-adjustment detecting means (for example, an output-amount changeover switch 71AK001 or the like) capable of detecting an operation relating to the adjustment of the output amount of the effect;
Output amount control means for controlling the output amount of the effect to any one of a plurality of stages based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detecting means (for example, the output switching process at the start of step 71AKS013 or the output change process in progress of step 71AKS019). Effect control CPU 120 to be executed), and
Limiting means for limiting the execution of the control by the output amount control means regardless of the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detecting means when the change is permitted, (for example, step AKS012 is executed as the power-on command processing of step 71AKS012). And the effect control CPU 120 for executing processing).
According to such a configuration, the execution of the control by the output amount control means is restricted when the change is permitted, so that it is possible to prevent a trouble in the work of changing the set value.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 99AK)
Next, the characteristic portion 99AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-8 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the characteristic portion 99AK. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 99AK is provided with first movable bodies 99AK001L and 99AK001R and second movable bodies 99AK002 as movable bodies that operate according to the effect.

  The first movable body 99AK001L is provided at the upper left position of the gaming machine frame 3, and the first movable body 99AK001R is provided at the upper right position of the gaming machine frame 3. The first movable body 99AK001L and the first movable body 99AK001R are also collectively referred to as a first movable body 99AK001. The first movable body 99AK001 is provided so as to be able to execute a protruding (advancing) operation toward the outside (left and right diagonally upward direction) of the gaming machine frame 3. Thus, the first movable body 99AK001 is operable to change the outer shape of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the characteristic portion 99AK, the speakers 8L and 8R are provided at lower left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3.

  The second movable body 99AK002 is provided at the left position of the gaming machine frame 3. The second movable body AK002 is provided so as to be able to execute a rotation operation clockwise or counterclockwise with respect to the player. Thus, the second movable body 99AK002 can operate without changing the outer shape of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Note that the operation modes of the first movable body 99AK001 and the second movable body 99AK002 are not limited to the above, and any operation may be performed as long as each operation is possible.

  As shown in FIG. 8-8, the first movable body 99AK001 and the second movable body 99AK002 are provided outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the player can contact them. Note that the player need not always be able to make contact, and the player may be able to make contact in either a seated state or a standing state. Further, the contact may be made at a predetermined timing during the game (for example, only when the first movable body 99AK001 protrudes).

  8-9, the first movable body 99AK001 and the second movable body 99AK002 are connected to the effect control board 12, and operate based on a control signal from the effect control board 12.

  Next, an operation example of the first movable bodies 99AK001L and 99AK001R will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8-10 (A) shows a case where the first movable body 99AK001 is at the origin position (position before operation), and FIG. 8-10 (B) shows a case where the first movable body 99AK001 is in the advanced position (half-projection). 8-10 (C) shows the case where the first movable body 99AK001 is at the post-operation position (maximally protruding position).

  As shown in FIGS. 8-10 (A) to (C), the first movable body 99AK001 has a rod-shaped accessory 99AK010 constituting the first movable body 99AK001 outside the gaming machine frame 3 (pachinko gaming machine 1). It protrudes (enters) toward it.

  When the first movable body 99AK001 is at the origin position (position before operation) as shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), the state in which the bar-shaped accessory 99AK010 is completely housed in the gaming machine frame 3 is shown. Become.

  The rod-shaped accessory 99AK010 of the first movable body 99AK001, when a predetermined protruding operation condition is satisfied (for example, at the time of an initial operation at the time of turning on the power, or a super-reach reach production execution period, etc.), is performed as shown in FIG. As shown in ()), the projection operation is performed in a diagonally upper left direction and a diagonally upper right direction when viewed from the front side. When operating to the post-operation position, it protrudes to the post-operation position as shown in FIG. When the projecting operation condition ends with the end of the reach effect or the like, the stick-shaped accessory 99AK010 is stored at the limited position shown in FIG.

  The rod-shaped accessory 99AK010 protrudes outward in response to, for example, the motor of the first movable body 99AK001 rotating forward and the drive gear rotating forward. In addition, the rod-shaped accessory 99AK010 is housed in the gaming machine frame 3 in response to the reverse rotation of the motor and the reverse rotation of the drive gear.

  In each of the first movable bodies 99AK001L and 99AK001R, a light-emitting member may be provided to emit light in accordance with a protruding operation or the like. Further, the protruding operation of the bar-shaped accessory 99AK010 of each of the first movable bodies 99AK001L and 99AK001R is, as described above, outward from the game frame 30 in the diagonally upper left direction and the diagonally upper right direction as viewed from the front. Any protruding operation may be used as long as it protrudes outside the gaming machine frame 3 (pachinko gaming machine 1). It may project in a direction, a forward direction, or a lateral direction.

  FIG. 8A is a diagram illustrating a functional configuration of the first movable body 99AK001. As shown in FIG. 8A, the first movable body 99AK001 includes a bar-shaped accessory 99AK010, a driving unit 99AK011, an origin position detector 99AK012, a post-operation position detector 99AK013, and a touch sensor 99AK014.

  The rod-shaped accessory 99AK010 is a rod-shaped member (accessory) that performs a protruding operation as shown in FIG. 8-10 in the first movable body 99AK001.

  The driving unit 99AK011 is configured by a motor, a driving gear, a belt, and the like, and performs a protruding operation of the bar-shaped accessory 99AK010 and a storing operation for terminating the protruding operation. The drive unit 99AK011 drives the stick-shaped accessory 99AK010 based on a control signal from the effect control board 12, and performs a projecting operation or a storing operation.

  The origin position detector 99AK012 is configured with a sensor (for example, a photo sensor, a pressure sensor, or a button) that can detect that the bar-shaped accessory 99AK010 is at the origin position (the bar-shaped accessory 99AK010 is completely housed). You.

  A sensor (for example, a photo sensor, a pressure sensor, etc.) capable of detecting that the post-operation position detector 99AK013 and the bar-shaped accessory 99AK010 are at the post-operation position (the position where the bar-shaped accessory 99AK010 is protruded to the maximum or the position where the protruding operation is completed). , Button).

  The touch sensor 99AK014 is a sensor (for example, a capacitance-type touch sensor or a pressure-sensitive sensor) that can detect that a player has touched the bar-shaped accessory 99AK010, and is provided on, for example, a tip portion or a side surface of the bar-shaped accessory 99AK010. Can be The origin position detector 99AK012, the post-operation position detector 99AK013, and the touch sensor 99AK014 can transmit the detection results to the effect control board 12. In this embodiment, the contact type touch sensor 99AK014 detects that the player has touched the bar-shaped accessory 99AK010. However, the non-contact sensor such as an infrared sensor or an optical sensor is used. You may make it detect or infer that the player contacted the thing 99AK010.

  In this embodiment, when the touch sensor 99AK014 detects the contact with the first movable body 99AK001 (the rod-shaped accessory 99AK010) during the operation of the first movable body 99AK001, it is possible to ensure the safety and prevent the first movable body 99AK001 from being damaged. In order to prevent a failure, the operation is stopped.

  FIG. 8B is a diagram illustrating a functional configuration of the second movable body 99AK002. As shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), the second movable body 99AK002 includes a circular accessory 99AK020, a driving unit 99AK021, an origin position detector 99AK022, and a rotation detector 99AK023.

  The circular accessory 99AK020 is a member having a circular (hemispherical) outer shape as shown in FIG. 8-8, and is configured to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise toward the player. As shown in FIG. 8-8, for example, the circular accessory 99AK020 has a star-shaped (pentagram) pattern.

  The driving unit 99AK021 includes a motor, a driving gear, a belt, and the like, and performs a rotation operation of the circular accessory 99AK020. The drive unit 99AK021 drives the circular accessory 99AK020 based on a control signal from the effect control board 12, and performs a rotation operation.

  The origin position detector 99AK022 can detect that the circular accessory 99AK020 is at the origin position (for example, a position where the top of one of the pentagrams drawn on the circular accessory 99AK020 is in the 12:00 direction). For example, it comprises a photo sensor, a pressure sensor, and a button. The circular accessory 99AK020 is controlled so as to return to the origin position when the rotation operation ends (the rotation operation stops at the origin position).

  The rotation detector 99AK022 and a sensor (for example, a photosensor, a pressure-sensitive sensor, and a button) that can detect that the circular accessory 99AK020 is rotating are configured. The origin position detector 99AK022 and the rotation detector 99AK022 can transmit the detection results to the effect control board 12.

  In this embodiment, when a rotation operation is not detected by the rotation detector 99AK022 during the rotation driving of the second movable body 99AK002, it is determined that an operation error has occurred. Then, when the number of occurrences of the operation error becomes a predetermined number (for example, two times), it is determined that the rotation operation is obstructed by the contact or the interference of the player, and the security is ensured and the second movable body 99AK002 is prevented. The operation is stopped in order to prevent breakage or failure.

  In the second movable body 99AK002, a light emitting member may be provided so as to emit light in accordance with a rotation operation or the like. In addition, the second movable body 99AK002 performs the rotating operation. However, the second movable body 99AK002 may be operable, and may protrude similarly to the first movable body 99AK001. May be moved or moved without changing the outer shape of.

  FIG. 8A is a diagram illustrating operation timings and operation contents of the first movable body 99AK001. As shown in FIG. 8A, in this embodiment, the first movable body 99AK001 operates when determining an effect to notify a variable display result (big hit) at the end timing of the reach effect and executing the effect. It protrudes to the rear position, and then is stored at the origin position. In addition, the protruding operation is performed to the advance position when the super-reach having a high degree of expectation among the super-reach is executed, and then stored at the origin position.

  FIG. 8B is a diagram illustrating operation timings and operation contents of the second movable body 99AK002. As shown in FIG. 8B, in this embodiment, the second movable body 99AK002 performs a rotating operation as a pre-reading notice when a game ball wins in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. It is supposed to run. The jackpot reliability varies depending on the rotation speed. In the example shown in FIG. 8-12 (B), the jackpot reliability increases in the order of the pre-read notice C> the pre-read notice B> the pre-read notice A, and the higher the big hit reliability, the higher the rotation speed. Note that, as a pre-reading notice, in addition to rotating the second movable body 99AK002, a reservation notice that changes the display mode of the hold display or the active display may be executed.

  Note that the first movable body 99AK001 and the second movable body 99AK002 may operate at times other than the timings shown in FIGS. The first movable body 99AK001 and the second movable body 99AK002 may operate at the same time.

  The first movable body 99AK001 and the second movable body 99AK002 execute an initial operation at the time of power-on. The initial operation (power-on operation) includes a long initial operation and a short initial operation. The long initial operation is an initial operation for performing the same operation as a normal effect operation during execution of an effect accompanying the progress of a game. By performing the long initial operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not a problem occurs in the normal effect operation. The short initial operation is an operation in which a part of operations in a normal effect operation is omitted, and is a return operation for returning the first movable body 99AK001 and the second movable body 99AK002 to the origin positions.

  FIG. 8-13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the movable body abnormality determination process performed by the effect control CPU 120. The movable body abnormality determination process is a process for determining whether or not there is an operation abnormality of the movable body during the operation of the movable body, and executing control for stopping the operation of the movable body when it is determined that there is an operation abnormality. is there. The output amount setting process may be executed for each timer interrupt, for example, in the effect control process process (after step S161). That is, during the period in which the operation of the movable body can be performed, the movable body abnormality determination processing may be performed so that the operation abnormality of the movable body can be determined.

  In the movable body abnormality determination process shown in FIG. 8-13, first, effect CPU 120 determines whether or not the first movable body error flag is on (step 99AKS001). The first movable body error flag is set to ON when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the first movable body 99AK001. That is, in step S99AKS001, it is determined whether an abnormality is occurring in the first movable body 99AK001.

  If the first movable body error flag is off (step 99AKS001; No), it is determined whether or not the first movable body 99AK001 is operating (step 99AKS002). Whether or not the first movable body 99AK001 is operating is determined by whether or not an effect control pattern for operating the first movable body 99AK001 is set and whether or not the effect control based on the effect control pattern is being executed. The determination may be made based on whether or not. Note that if the first movable body 99AK001 is performing any one of the protruding operation, the storing operation, and the home return operation after the abnormality determination, it may be determined that the first movable body 99AK001 is operating.

  The operation to be determined in step 99AKS002 does not include the initial operation (short initial operation, long initial operation). That is, in step 99AKS002, it is determined whether or not the movable body 99AK001 is operating other than the initial operation. Thereby, during the initial operation, it is possible to omit the monitoring of the occurrence of the abnormality (the abnormality mainly caused by the player) in the first movable body 99AK001, and it is possible to reduce the processing load. On the other hand, of the initial operations, at least one of the short initial operation and the long initial operation may be monitored for occurrence of an abnormality in the first movable body 99AK001.

  When it is determined that the first movable body 99AK001 is in operation (step 99AKS002; Yes), it is determined whether or not the touch sensor 99AK014 has detected contact with the first movable body 99AK001 (bar-shaped accessory 99AK010) (step 99AK001). Step 99AKS003).

  When the contact with the first movable body 99AK001 is detected by the touch sensor 99AK014 (step 99AKS003; Yes), a control for stopping the operation of the first movable body 99AK001 (projecting operation of the bar-shaped role 99AK010) is executed (step 99AKS004). ). In step 99AKS004, driving by the driving unit 99AK011 is stopped.

  Note that the first movable body 99AK001 includes a first movable body 99AK001L and a first movable body 99AK001R. Even when the contact is detected by the touch sensor AK014 of one of the first movable bodies 99AK001, both of them are provided. The operation of the first movable body 99AK001 may be stopped. Thereby, it is possible to prevent an incomplete effect from being executed. The operation of only the first movable body 99AK001 in which the contact is detected may be stopped.

  Then, the first movable body error flag indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the first movable body 99AK001 is set to ON (step 99AK005). Further, after stopping the operation of the first movable body 99AK001, a timer for measuring a return operation standby time (for example, 60 seconds) corresponding to the standby time until returning to the origin position is set (started) (step 99AKS006). ), The movable body abnormality determination processing ends.

  If a contact with the first movable body 99AK001 is further detected in step 99AKS003 during the return operation after the abnormality determination, an operation in which the first movable body 99AK001 is not operated thereafter until, for example, the initial operation when power is turned on again succeeds. It may be in a stopped state. When the first movable body 99AK001 is in the operation stop state, the effect using the first movable body 99AK001 may not be determined by lottery, or may be substituted when the effect using the first movable body 99AK001 is determined. May be performed.

  If the first movable body error flag is ON in step 99AKS001 (step 99AKS001; Yes), it is determined whether or not the return operation standby time set in step 99AKS006 has elapsed (step 99AKS007). If the return operation standby time has not elapsed (step 99AKS007; No), the movable body abnormality determination processing ends.

  If the return operation standby time has elapsed (step 99AKS007; Yes), the operation control for returning the first movable body 99AK001 to the origin position (for storing the bar-shaped accessory 99AK010) is executed (step 99AKS008). The body error flag is cleared to off (step 99AKS009). Thereafter, the movable body abnormality determination processing ends.

  When it is determined that the movable body 99AK001 is not operating (step 99AKS002; No), it is determined whether or not the second movable body error flag is on (step 99AKS010). The second movable body error flag is set to ON when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the second movable body 99AK002. That is, in step S99AKS010, it is determined whether an abnormality has occurred in the second movable body 99AK002.

  When the second movable body error flag is off (step 99AKS010; No), it is determined whether or not the second movable body 99AK002 is operating (step 99AKS011). Whether or not the second movable body 99AK002 is operating is determined by whether or not an effect control pattern for operating the second movable body 99AK002 is set and whether or not the effect control based on the effect control pattern is being executed. The determination may be made based on the above. Note that if the second movable body 99AK002 is performing any one of a rotation operation and an origin return operation after abnormality determination, it may be determined that the second movable body 99AK002 is operating.

  Note that the operation to be determined in step 99AKS011 does not include the initial operation (short initial operation, long initial operation). That is, in step 99AKS011, it is determined whether or not the movable body 99AK002 is operating other than the initial operation. Thus, during the initial operation, it is possible to omit the monitoring of the occurrence of the abnormality (the abnormality mainly caused by the player) in the second movable body 99AK002, and it is possible to reduce the processing load. On the other hand, among the initial operations, at least one of the short initial operation and the long initial operation may be monitored for occurrence of an abnormality in the second movable body 99AK002.

  When it is determined that the second movable body 99AK002 is operating (step 99AKS011; Yes), a re-detection time (for example, 5 seconds) until the second movable body 99AK002 is normally operated is detected again. Is determined (step 99AKS012).

  If the re-detection time has elapsed (step 99AKS012; Yes), the rotation detector 99AK023 determines whether the rotation operation of the circular accessory 99AK020 has been detected (step 99AKS013). In step 99AKS013, the rotation detector 99AK023 determines whether the first movable body 99AK002 is operating normally.

  If the second movable body 99AK002 is not operating (step 99AKS011; No), if the re-detection time has not elapsed (step 99AKS012; No), if the rotation of the circular character 99AK020 is detected (step 99AKS013; Yes), the movable body abnormality determination processing ends.

  When the rotation operation of the circular accessory 99AK020 is not detected (step 99AKS013; No), it is determined that the operation abnormality of the second movable body 99AK002 has occurred, and the value of the error counter for counting the number of operation abnormalities is incremented by one. (Step 99AKS014).

  If the value of the error counter is not 2 (step 99AKS015; No), that is, if the value of the error counter is 1 and the operation abnormality of the second movable body 99AK002 is detected for the first time, the second movable body A timer for measuring a re-detection time (for example, 5 seconds) until re-detecting whether or not 99AK002 is operating normally is set (started) (step 99AKS020), and the movable body abnormality determination processing ends.

  If the value of the error counter is 2 (step 99AKS015; Yes), that is, if the operation abnormality of the second movable body 99AK002 is detected for the second time, the value of the error counter is reset to 0 (step 99AKS016). (2) Control to stop the operation of the movable body 99AK002 (rotational operation of the circular accessory 99AK020) is executed (step 99AKS017). In step 99AKS017, driving by the driving unit 99AK021 is stopped.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation of the second movable body 99AK002 is stopped when the operation abnormality is detected twice. During the return operation, the operation may be stopped when an operation abnormality is detected once.

  Then, a second movable body error flag indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the second movable body 99AK002 is set to ON (step 99AK018). Further, after stopping the operation of the second movable body 99AK002, a timer for measuring a return operation standby time (for example, 60 seconds) corresponding to the standby time until returning to the origin position is set (started) (step 99AKS019). ), The movable body abnormality determination processing ends.

  If the second movable body 99AK002 is further detected to be abnormal in steps 99AKS013 and 99AKS015 during the return operation after the abnormality determination, the second movable body 99AK002 is thereafter operated until the initial operation at power-on is succeeded. The operation may be stopped without operation. When the second movable body 99AK002 is in the operation stop state, the effect using the second movable body 99AK002 may not be determined by lottery, or may be substituted when the effect using the second movable body 99AK002 is determined. May be performed.

  If the second movable body error flag is ON in step 99AKS010 (step 99AKS010; Yes), it is determined whether the return operation standby time set in step 99AKS019 has elapsed (step 99AKS021). If the return operation standby time has not elapsed (step 99AKS021; No), the movable body abnormality determination processing ends.

  If the return operation standby time has elapsed (step 99AKS021; Yes), operation control is performed to return the second movable body 99AK002 to the origin position (rotate the circular character 99AK020 to return to the origin position) (step 99AKS022). ), Clear the second movable body error flag to OFF (step 99AKS023). Thereafter, the movable body abnormality determination processing ends.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the first movable body 99AK001 determines that an abnormality has occurred when the contact with the first movable body 99AK001 is detected, and the second movable body 99AK002 does not detect the rotation operation. When an error occurs, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. Further, the first movable body 99AK001 stops operating when the occurrence of the abnormality is detected once, and the second movable body 99AK002 stops operating when the occurrence of the abnormality is detected twice. ing. As described above, by making the abnormality determination method different according to the type of the movable body, it is possible to perform the abnormality determination according to the shape and the operation of the movable body, and it is possible to execute the control for suitably stopping the operation.

(Modification of the characteristic part 99AK)
In addition, the abnormality determination method of each movable body is not limited to the method of this embodiment. For example, after the operation of the first movable body 99AK001 starts, the post-operation position detector 99AK013 detects that the rod-shaped accessory 99AK010 is at the post-operation position after a predetermined period (time until moving to the projecting position) has elapsed. If this is not possible, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred in the first movable body 99AK001. Further, after a predetermined period (time until returning to the origin position) elapses from the start of the operation of the second movable body 99AK002, the origin position detector 99AK022 cannot detect that the circular accessory 99AK020 is at the origin position. In this case, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred in the second movable body 99AK002. Further, when a foreign object is detected in the operation direction by the non-contact sensor, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  The method for determining the abnormality of the movable body may be determined in consideration of the shape, weight, hardness, size, position, operation mode, operation speed, torque strength, safety, and the like of the movable body. For example, for a movable body whose operation should be stopped immediately for safety, it is preferable to employ an abnormality determination method that is easily detected. Further, in the same movable body, the abnormality determination method may be different depending on the operation mode. For example, in the above embodiment, the abnormality determination method may be different between the case where the first movable body 99AK001 operates up to the advance position and the case where it operates up to the protruding position. By doing so, it is possible to execute the operation stop control suitable for the movable body.

  The first movable body 99AK001 and the second movable body 99AK002 stop the operation when an abnormality is detected during the operation, and perform the operation of returning to the origin position after the elapse of the return operation standby time after the operation is stopped. However, after the operation is stopped, the movable body may be in the operation stopped state without returning to the home position until the next power-on.

  An abnormality notification unit that notifies an operation abnormality of the first movable body 99AK001 and / or the second movable body 99AK002 may be provided. The abnormality notification unit may be any unit that notifies the occurrence of the operation abnormality by displaying on the image display device 5, outputting a sound such as a lamp point, outputting a signal to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or the like. The abnormality notification means may report the operation abnormality during the initial operation when monitoring the operation abnormality during the initial operation without reporting the operation abnormality during the progress of the game. By doing so, even if an operation abnormality occurs during the progress of the game, the progress of the game is not hindered by the notification of the occurrence of the abnormality. In addition, during the initial operation, an operation abnormality can be discovered by an administrator or the like, and the movable body can be repaired.

  The presence / absence of the operation and the operation mode of the first movable body 99AK001 and / or the second movable body 99AK002 may be set. For example, the protrusion degree of the protrusion operation of the first movable body 99AK001 and the rotation speed (maximum speed) of the second movable body 99AK002 may be set in advance. In this way, the movable body can be operated by a player's favorite operation or an operation suitable for the hall.

  A configuration for enabling control of an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to a player based on the set value, and enabling a set value to be changed based on a predetermined setting change operation, and a set value that is set. May be provided. Then, when the setting value is being changed (change permitted state), the short initial operation may be executed as the initial operation of the first movable body 99AK001 and / or the second movable body 99AK002. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the operation of the movable body from hindering the operation of changing the set value.

  Alternatively, the short initial operation may be performed when the change permission state is not controlled with the start of power supply, and the short initial operation may not be performed when the change permission state is established. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the operation of the movable body from hindering the operation of changing the set value.

  In addition, when the short initial operation is performed when the power is turned on, the abnormality of the first movable body 99AK001 and / or the second movable body 99AK002 is monitored by executing the movable body abnormality determination process illustrated in FIG. It may be. In this case, in the setting value changing operation or the checking operation, a control is executed to immediately stop the operation of the movable body that hinders the worker when an abnormality (for example, one contact) is detected. For a movable body that is unlikely to hinder the operation, control may be performed to try to operate even after an abnormality (for example, an operation abnormality) is detected, and to stop the operation if the abnormality is further abnormal. In this way, it is possible to prevent the short initial operation from hindering the operation of changing the set value.

(Description of the means relating to the characteristic portion 99AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 99AK
A gaming machine capable of performing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A first effect movable body (for example, a first movable body 99AK001L, a first movable body 99AK001R) provided so as to be accessible to a player;
A second effect movable body (for example, a second movable body 99AK002) provided so as to be accessible to a player;
Operation control means (for example, effect control CPU 120, drive unit 99AK011, drive unit 99AK021) for controlling the operation of the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body,
The operation control means,
A control for stopping the operation of the first effect movable body during the operation thereof can be executed (for example, the process of step 99AKS004 can be executed),
A control for stopping the operation of the second effect movable body during the operation thereof can be executed (for example, the process of Step 99AKS017 can be executed),
The operations of the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body are stopped under different conditions (different determinations are made in step 99AKS003 and steps 99AKS013, 99AKS015).
According to such a configuration, the operation can be suitably stopped according to the type of the production movable body.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1),
The first production movable body is operable to change the outer shape of the gaming machine (for example, the first movable body 99AK001 protrudes outward as shown in FIG. 8-10),
The second effect movable body may be operable without changing the outer shape of the gaming machine (for example, the second movable body 99AK002 may rotate).
According to such a configuration, the operation can be suitably stopped according to the type of the production movable body.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2),
An abnormality determining means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing the processing of step 99AKS003, steps 99AKS013, and 99AKS015) which can determine the presence or absence of an abnormality in the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body;
The operation control means,
On the basis of the determination result by the abnormality determining means, control for stopping the operation of the first effect movable body can be performed (for example, the process of step 99AKS004 can be performed), and
Based on the result of the determination by the abnormality determining means, a control for stopping the operation of the second effect movable body during the operation can be executed (for example, the process of step 99AKS017 can be executed),
The second production movable body is controlled such that the time from when it is determined that there is an abnormality to the time when the operation is stopped is longer than that of the first production movable body (for example, when contact is detected in step 99AKS003). As soon as this is done, the operation of the first movable body 99AK001 may be stopped, and the operation of the second movable body 99AK002 may be stopped when the second operation abnormality is detected in step 99AKS015).
According to such a configuration, the operation can be suitably stopped according to the type of the production movable body.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
An abnormality determining means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing the processing of step 99AKS003, steps 99AKS013, and 99AKS015) which can determine the presence or absence of an abnormality in the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body;
The operation control means,
The first effect movable body is stopped for the first number of times when it is determined that there is an abnormality (for example, when the contact is detected once in step 99AKS003, the operation of the first movable body 99AK001 is stopped),
The second production movable body stops operation when it is determined that there is an abnormality for a second number of times greater than the first number of times (for example, when a second operation abnormality is detected in step 99AKS015). The operation of the second movable body 99AK002 may be stopped).
According to such a configuration, the operation can be suitably stopped according to the type of the production movable body.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (4),
An abnormality determining means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing the processing of step 99AKS003, steps 99AKS013, and 99AKS015) which can determine the presence or absence of an abnormality in the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body;
The abnormality determining means determines that the first effect movable body has an abnormality when the first condition is satisfied (for example, in step 99AKS003, it is determined that there is an abnormality when the touch sensor 99AK014 detects a contact. ), When the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the second effect movable body (for example, in step 99AKS013, when the rotation detector 99AK023 does not detect the rotation operation, the operation abnormality is detected. Is determined to have occurred).
According to such a configuration, the operation can be suitably stopped according to the type of the production movable body.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5),
Abnormality determining means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 executing the processing of step 99AKS003, steps 99AKS013, and 99AKS015) that can determine the presence or absence of an abnormality in the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body;
Detecting means (for example, a touch sensor 99AK014) for detecting a contact of a player,
The abnormality determination unit determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the first effect movable body based on a detection result by the detection unit (for example, in step 99AKS003, it is determined that there is an abnormality when the touch sensor 99AK014 detects a contact. Judgment).
According to such a configuration, the effect movable body can be operated safely.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6),
The first production movable body and the second production movable body are operable between an origin position and a post-operation position, respectively.
The operation control means,
After executing the control for stopping the operation during the operation with the first effect movable body, it is possible to execute the control for moving the first effect movable body to the origin position after a predetermined period elapses (for example, If it is determined in step 99AKS007 that the return operation standby time has elapsed, the process of step 99AKS008 is executed),
After executing the control for stopping the operation during the operation with the second effect movable body, it is possible to execute the control for moving the second effect movable body to the origin position after a predetermined period elapses (for example, If it is determined in step 99AKS021 that the return operation standby time has elapsed, the process of step 99AKS022 may be executed).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7),
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage for the player is different based on the set value;
Setting control means (for example, CPU 103 for executing the processing of steps Sa6 and Sa12) capable of controlling a change permission state for permitting the setting value to be changed by the setting means with the start of power supply;
A movable member operable in accordance with the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member operated by the operation motors AK011 to AK013, a second movable member operated by the operation motor AK014, and the like);
At least a movable control means (for example, a step) capable of controlling a return operation (for example, a short initial operation or the like) for returning the movable member to the origin position and an initial operation (for example, a long initial operation) by the movable member. Effect control CPU 120 for executing command processing at power-on of AKS012).
The movable control means may perform control to execute the return operation when the change permission state is set (for example, execution of step 72AKS007).
According to such a configuration, the return operation of returning the movable member to the origin position is performed in the change permission state, so that it is possible to prevent the trouble in the work of changing the set value.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (8),
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage for the player is different based on the set value;
Setting control means (for example, CPU 103 for executing the processing of steps Sa6 and Sa12) capable of controlling a change permission state for permitting the setting value to be changed by the setting means with the start of power supply;
A movable member operable in accordance with the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member operated by the operation motors AK011 to AK013, a second movable member operated by the operation motor AK014, and the like);
At least movable control means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing a power-on command process in step AKS012) capable of executing a return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position,
The movable control means,
When the control is not controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, control for executing the return operation is performed (for example, execution of step 73AKS010).
When the change is permitted, the control for executing the return operation may not be performed (for example, execution of steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009).
According to such a configuration, since the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is not executed in the change permission state, it is possible to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value.

(Explanation of the configuration related to other features)
Next, other features of the embodiment of the present invention will be described. This feature enables control of an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player based on the set value, and a configuration or a setting for enabling the set value to be changed based on a predetermined setting change operation. There is provided a configuration for enabling the user to confirm the set value by display. Then, a set value can be displayed by a configuration capable of displaying information on a game value such as a prize ball given based on a game medium such as a game ball entering a predetermined area.

  FIG. 9-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this characteristic portion. The same components as those in the above embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals. For example, the output circuit 111 may have a configuration similar to that of the solenoid circuit 111. The first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B only need to have the same configuration as the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B. The effect display device 5 only needs to have the same configuration as the image display device 5. The case where the display result is “outside” (hiragana) is the same as the case where the display result is “losing” (Katakana). The first general winning opening switch 26A, the second general winning opening switch 26B, the third general winning opening switch 26C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 26D are game balls that have passed (entered) any one of the plurality of general winning openings 10. Is detected, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection.

  The effect control board 12 is connected to operation motors AK011 to AK014 for driving a movable member serving as a movable role (movable effect device) and origin sensors AK021 to AK024 for detecting the origin position of the movable member. . The operation motors AK011 to AK014 may be motors or motors using an electromagnetic solenoid. The origin sensors AK021 to AK024 may be configured using a contact-type sensor such as a microswitch or a non-contact-type sensor such as a photosensor or a capacitance sensor. The effect control board 12 is provided with a real-time clock (RTC) 126 capable of outputting time information.

  In this embodiment, when controlled to the small hitting game state, a second special winning opening provided separately from the first special winning opening, which is a special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, An open state is established in a predetermined open mode. For example, in the small hitting game state, the second large winning opening is opened in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls is generated. State. In the present embodiment, the second big winning opening is set to be opened once until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses in the small hitting game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be opened a plurality of times in the small hitting game state. The second special winning opening is opened by the second special winning opening door when the solenoid 83 for the second special winning opening door is on, and the game ball passes (enters) the second special winning opening. It will be easier. On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 for the second special winning opening door is in the off state, the second special winning opening is closed by the second special winning opening door, and the game ball passes through the second special winning opening ( Entry). As described above, the second large winning opening changes between an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), which is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter), which is disadvantageous for the player. In addition, in place of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) the second big winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state where the game ball is hard to pass (enter) the second big winning port is provided. You may.

  The count switch 23 serves as a first count switch that detects a game ball that has passed (entered) the first special winning opening. Game balls passing through (entering) the second special winning opening pass through a second count switch installed in the second special winning opening, and are detected by the second count switch. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second count switch, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Thus, when the game ball passes through (enters) the second large winning opening that has been opened, the game ball passes (enters) another normal winning opening, for example, the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. ), More prize balls will be paid out. Therefore, when the second special winning opening is in the open state, the game balls can enter the second special winning opening, and the first state is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the second special winning opening is closed, it becomes impossible or difficult to pass (enter) a game ball to the second special winning opening to obtain a prize ball, which is disadvantageous for the player. There are two states.

  A third count switch and a fourth count switch through which a game ball can pass are provided inside the second big winning opening. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second winning port passes through either the third count switch or the fourth count switch, and is guided to the back side of the game board 2. The game ball passes through the third count switch and is detected by the third count switch. The game ball is detected by the fourth count switch by passing through the fourth count switch.

  In the present embodiment, the game state after the end of the small hit game is controlled to the big hit game state based on the detection of the game ball by the third count switch during the small hit game. Therefore, if the course of the game ball is changed by adding vibration or the like and the third count switch detects the game ball during the period in which the second big winning opening door is opened during the small hit game, Since it becomes possible for the player to be controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous for the player, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment stops the game in such a case.

  A regulating member that regulates and permits the flow of the game ball toward the third count switch is provided inside the second winning hole. The restricting member is provided so as to be changeable between a restricting state in which the flowing of the game ball toward the third count switch is restricted and an allowable state in which the flowing of the game ball toward the third count switch is permitted. Have been.

  In the small hitting game state, when a game ball that has won the second big winning opening passes through the third count switch, a "big hit" based on the passing of the game ball by the third count switch (V winning big hit). That is, the CPU 103 controls the game state to the big hit game state based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the third count switch. On the other hand, if the game ball that has won the second big winning opening in the small hitting game state passes through the fourth count switch, the "big hit" does not occur. That is, the CPU 103 does not control the gaming state to the big hit gaming state based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the fourth count switch.

  Then, when the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state based on the passage of the third count switch, the second big winning opening door is set to a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number ( During the period until the winning balls (for example, 10) are generated, the second winning port is opened. As a result, a round game in which the second large winning opening is set to the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player is executed. In the present embodiment, the second big winning opening is controlled to the first state when the state is controlled to the big hit game state based on the passage of the third count switch. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited thereto, and the first special winning opening may be controlled to the first state.

  The round game, which is the opening cycle of the second special winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “15” or “5”). Even before the number of round game executions reaches the upper limit number, the round game may be terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball does not win the second big winning opening). Good.

  FIG. 9B is a rear view showing the main board 11, the effect control board 12, the power supply board 17, and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 while being housed in the board case 201. The main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 29 that can be viewed from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and has a function of displaying various kinds of winning information related to winning on the display monitor 29. A display switch 30 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 29, and the information displayed on the display monitor 29 can be switched by operating the display switch 30.

  The main board 11 has a door opening sensor 90 for detecting the opening of a glass door frame which covers the front of the game board 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a large winning opening for detecting the opening of the first and second big winning prizes. Various sensors such as a door sensor 91 are connected, and a function of determining occurrence of various abnormalities (errors) based on detection signals output from these sensors is also provided. A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 of the main board 11 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  The main substrate 11 is sealed in a substrate case 201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material. A display monitor 29 (for example, 7 segments) is disposed in the center of the main substrate 11, and a right side of the display monitor 29 is provided. A display changeover switch 30 is provided. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged at the front when the main board 11 is viewed. The main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in a state where the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened. Therefore, the front face when viewing the main board 11 refers to the back side of the game board 2 in a state where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. This is a front view when viewing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is provided with each winning opening (a first winning opening, a second winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a general winning opening, hereinafter referred to as “entrance area”). ) Is counted, and various kinds of winning information, such as the ratio and the winning ratio, are displayed on the display monitor 29 based on the counting, and the winning information is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to confirm various kinds of winning information such as the connection ratio and the winning ratio after the installation in the game hall. On the maker side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual that the game board surface is designed so that the game ball enters the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency (to pass the test). Further, when performing the test, it is confirmed (verified) whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, whether or not the adjustment has been performed, what kind of adjustment has been performed, and as a result of the adjustment, the gaming ball enters the general winning opening at the frequency as designed. Is checked (verified). Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize the presence or absence of the adjustment after installation and the contents.

  The power supply board 17 is configured to be able to supply power from an AC power supply (AC 100 V), which is an external power supply (commercial power supply), to electric components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the production control board 12. ing. The power supply board 17 is sealed in a board case 202 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and a lock switch 51 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state is provided on the upper right side of the rear surface of the power supply board 17. In the change state, there is provided a setting changeover switch 52 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value such as a jackpot winning probability (a payout rate). The power supply board 17 is provided with a clear switch AK001 and a power switch AK002.

  The lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the person in possession can operate. Further, since the lock switch 51 requires key operation, only the staff having the key for operating the lock switch 51 can be operated among the staff at the game arcade. The lock switch 51 is a switch that can execute an ON / OFF switching operation by a predetermined key, and is also a switch that can execute an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pressing operation).

  When a power-on operation using the power switch AK002 is performed, a predetermined operation using the lock switch 51 or the clear switch AK001, such as an on / off switching operation of the lock switch 51 and a pressing operation of the clear switch AK001, is performed. May be asked. The lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 may perform a predetermined operation using these switches simultaneously with the power-on operation using the power switch AK002. Therefore, at least the lock switch 51, the clear switch AK001, and the power switch AK002 only need to be arranged at positions where they can be operated simultaneously by game room attendants or the like. As described above, the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 can detect various operations such as on / off switching operation and pressing operation by game room attendants or the like in accordance with the power-on operation using the power switch AK002. Is configured.

  At the lower part on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, there is provided a nozzle (discharge port) for discharging a gaming ball that has won a winning port or a gaming ball that has entered the out port to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is provided with an outlet switch 70 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a shot game ball). The signal from the outlet switch 70 is taken into the switch circuit 110 of the main board 11.

  FIG. 9C is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the content of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration. The first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". This command form is an example, and another command form may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  The command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating a variation start in the special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating a variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the effect display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content of the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for specifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or an effect symbol. In the variable display result notification command, when the variable display result is a "losing", "big hit", or "small hit" determination result (predetermined result) or when the variable display result is "big hit" Different EXT data is set in accordance with the result of determining which one of the jackpot types is one of the plurality (the jackpot type determination result).

  The variable display result notification command includes, for example, commands 8C00H to 8C05H. The command 8C00H is a first variable display result designating command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “out”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit A”. The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit B”.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the stop (decision) of the decoration symbol in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the effect display device 5. The command 9000H is a RAM clear notification command for notifying that the contents stored in the RAM 102 have been cleared with the initialization of the game control microcomputer 100 when the power supply is started by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is. The command 9100H is a setting change start command for designating the start of a setting change state in which a set value can be changed when power supply is started by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The command 9200H is a power failure recovery designation command for specifying execution of a power failure recovery process corresponding to power failure recovery. The command 93XXH is a setting change end command for designating the end of the setting change state.

  In the setting change end command, for example, EXT data corresponding to a set value newly set by the change may be set. In this case, different EXT data is set according to the set value newly set by the change in the setting change state or the set value continuously set without being changed. When the setting value has three stages of 1 to 3, the command 9300H specifies that the setting value is set to “1”, and the command 9301H specifies that the setting value is set to “2”. However, the command 9302H may specify that the setting value is set to “3”. Alternatively, as the setting change end command, only the command 9300H whose EXT data is 00H is prepared, and the end of the setting change state may be designated by the command 9300H regardless of the setting value newly set by the change. Alternatively, as an effect control command different from the setting change end command, a setting value designation command for designating a setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be provided. In addition to the case where the setting value designation command is transmitted along with the transmission of the setting change end command, for example, with the transmission of the first fluctuation start command or the second fluctuation start command, the setting value designation command corresponds to the start of fluctuation in each time of the special figure game. May be transmitted. Also, for example, a set value designation command may be transmitted as the predetermined number of times of the fluctuation display is executed, such as every ten times of the fluctuation start in the special figure game. Alternatively or additionally, the setting value designation command may be transmitted with the transmission of the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command. A setting value designation command may be transmitted along with the transmission of the customer waiting demonstration designation command.

  The command 9400H is a setting confirmation start command for designating the start of a setting confirmation state in which a set value can be confirmed when power supply is started by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The command 9401H is a setting confirmation end command for designating the end of the setting confirmation state. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, a command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time reduction control is not performed, and a command 9501H is a game state (high base state) in which time reduction control is performed. , Time-saving state).

  The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command for specifying the occurrence of an error (abnormal) and the type of the generated error (abnormal) in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormal) designation command, for example, the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormal) is set, thereby specifying which error (abnormal) has been determined to be generated on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by an error notification process. The command 9F00H is a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating the display of a customer waiting demonstration screen (demo screen display) by displaying an effect image corresponding to the stoppage of the game in the customer waiting state.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fan fare command”) for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening designation command for designating a period in which the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a command after the opening of the special winning opening that specifies a period in which the special winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type decision result by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during opening of the special winning opening or the notification command after opening of the special winning opening, different EXT data is set in accordance with the number of rounds executed in the big hit game state or the small hit game state (for example, “1” to “15”). Is done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the ordinary winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display 4A is satisfied. The command B200H indicates that a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. This is a second starting opening winning designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display 4B is established.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number. The first reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting winning port and the first starting condition has been satisfied. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the second starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning port and the second starting condition is satisfied. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command are used when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved storages decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of the execution.

  Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) of the total reserved storage number may be used.

  The command D100H is a V prize notification designation command for notifying that the third count switch has been turned on when the game ball has passed the third count switch, that is, that a V prize has been won. In the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform a control for executing a V-prize notification effect for notifying that a V-prize has been won based on the reception of the V-prize notification designation command. In the V-prize information presentation effect, a different effect pattern may be determined or the determination ratio of a plurality of effect patterns may be made different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As described above, the setting value may be suggested according to the presentation mode of the V winning announcement effect. For example, when the effect image indicating "V" is rotated and displayed, the effect mode of the V winning information effect includes an effect mode in which the rotation direction is clockwise and an effect mode in which the rotation direction is counterclockwise. May be. Alternatively, a plurality of effect modes in which the display color of the effect image indicating “V” is different may be included. Then, a setting value designation command may be transmitted along with the transmission of the V winning notification designation command. Thus, when the V winning notification effect is performed, it is possible to appropriately determine the effect mode according to the set value.

  FIG. 9D is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value serving as a game random number counted on the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, on the main substrate 11 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the random number value MR3 for determining the general figure display result. Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of the MR4 is controlled to be countable. It should be noted that other random numbers may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software using a different random counter in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, an example is shown in which each of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of each of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 is May be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 9-5 shows a fluctuation pattern in the present embodiment. Hereinafter, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach loss is also referred to as a non-reach fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern of the reach loss is also referred to as a reach fluctuation pattern. Further, the variation pattern in which the display result is “big hit” is also referred to as a large hit variation pattern, and the variation pattern in which the display result is “small hit” is also referred to as a small hit variation pattern.

  The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A variation pattern may be provided. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ, in addition to super reach α and super reach β, may be provided.

  In the ROM 101, for example, a display result determination table (set value 1), a display result determination table (set value 2), a display result determination table (set value 3), a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), a big hit type determination A table (for the second special symbol), a small hit type determination table, and the like are stored.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured such that the winning probability (winning rate) of a big hit and a small hit changes according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability (winning rate) of the big hit and the small hit is changed. The set value has three stages of 1 to 3, 1 is the highest payout rate, and the payout rate decreases as the value increases in the order of 1, 2, and 3. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2, 3, the advantage gradually decreases.

  FIG. 9-6 is an explanatory diagram of the display result determination table. In the display result determination table, a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the display result determination table, the variable special figure designating buffer is 1 (first), that is, the variable special figure designating buffer is 2 (second), and the variable special figure designating buffer is 2 (second). For each of the cases where the second special symbol is subjected to the variable display, a determination value for a large hit and a determination value for a small hit are set.

  FIG. 9A illustrates a display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1. When the display variable determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, if the variable special figure designating buffer is the first, that is, if the first special symbol is to be subjected to the variable display, the set value is “ It is determined that a big hit is won with a higher probability (1/99) than the case of “2” and “3”, and that a part of these judgment values is set as a judgment value corresponding to a small hit. The small hit is won with a higher probability (1/50) than when the value is “2” or “3”. When the display variable determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, if the variable special figure specification buffer is the second, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is the same as the case where the variable special figure specification buffer is the first. Is determined, and even when the second special symbol is subjected to the variable display, the big hit is obtained with the same probability (1/99) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. And half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, so that the probability (100/200) is higher than when the first special symbol is a target of variable display. ) To win a small hit.

  FIG. 9B illustrates a display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2. When using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the jackpot is hit with a lower probability (1/150) than when the setting value is “1”. At the same time as winning, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hits, so that the small hits have a lower probability (1/99) than when the set value is “1”. You are going to win. When the display variable determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 is used, if the variable special figure specification buffer is the second, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is the same as the case where the variable special figure specification buffer is the first. Is determined, and when the second special symbol is subjected to the variable display, the big hit is obtained with the same probability (1/150) as when the first special symbol is the variable display. And half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, so that the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display, and , A small hit is won with the same probability (100/200) as when the set value is “1”.

  FIG. 9C illustrates a display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3. When using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 and the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is set, but the determination value corresponding to the small hit is When the first special symbol is set as a variable display target, the jackpot has a lower probability (1/200) than the case where the set value is “1” or “2”. Wins, but does not win small hits (win probability: 0). When using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is the same as the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the first. Is set, and even when the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, the big hit with the same probability (1/200) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. And half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, so that the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display, and , The small value is won with the same probability (100/200) as when the set value is “1” or “2”.

  The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any one of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the special symbol has a big hit (big hit A to big hit). Jackpot C). If MR1 matches any one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is set to the small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The “probability” indicates a probability (ratio) of a big hit and a probability (ratio) of a small hit. To determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state, but to stop the symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is a big hit symbol It is also to decide whether or not to do. Determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hitting game state. However, the stop in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is determined. That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol is a small hit symbol. As described above, since the probability of being controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state is different depending on the set value, if the set value is changed, one setting is set in a plurality of settings having different degrees of advantage for the player. Will be changed to another setting.

  In the present embodiment, in each of the display result determination tables, the winning probability of small hits when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second is assumed to be the same, but the small hits are set in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. The winning probability may be reduced. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first, the winning probability of the small hit is made lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3, but the same as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second. Alternatively, the same winning probability may be used for all the setting values.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination table to determine whether to make a big hit or a small hit. However, the big hit determination table and the small hit determination table are provided separately, The determination is made using a common table in the case of the variation display of the first special symbol and the case of the variation display of the second special symbol regardless of the variation special figure designation buffer. The processing may be performed by using separate tables for the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the first and the case where the buffer is the second.

  In the present embodiment, when the display variable determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the determination value other than the determination value corresponding to the big hit is determined as the determination value corresponding to the small hit. It was not set, that is, the small hit was not won, but a part of the judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit was set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, and the small hit was won. It may be. That is, the fact that the ratio of the small hit probability differs depending on the set value includes that the small hit probability is 0%.

  In the present embodiment, a total of three setting values 1 to 3 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 May be set to two or four or more (for example, six). Further, the advantage of the player according to the set value is not limited to the advantage that the smaller the set value is, the higher the advantage is for the player, and the larger the set value is, the higher the advantage is for the player. Is also good. For example, in the case where the set value is made up of six stages from 1 to 6, 1 is the lowest payout rate, and the payout rate increases as the value increases in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, and 6 The highest payout rate may be used. As described above, when the set value is set to 1, the advantage is lowest for the player, and when 6 is set, the advantage is highest for the player. The advantage may be gradually increased.

  FIG. 9-7 is an explanatory diagram of the big hit type determination table and the small hit type determination table. The big hit type determination table indicates that the big hit type is one of the big hit A to the big hit C based on the hit type determining random number (MR2) when the change display result is determined to be a big hit symbol. Is referred to to determine. The small hit type determination table indicates that the type of the small hit is the small hit A or the small hit B based on the random number (MR2) for the hit type determination when the variation display result is determined to be the small hit symbol. Is referred to to determine. In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the third count switch during the small hit game of the small hit A, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type of the big hit D is executed. Has become. When the game ball passes through the third count switch during the small hit game of the small hit B, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type of the big hit E is executed. . The big hit D and the big hit E are not the big hit type determined by the random number value MR2 for hit type determination extracted at the time of the start winning, and the game ball is not played during the small hit game of the small hit A or the small hit B. This is a type of jackpot determined by whether or not a three-count switch has been passed.

  FIG. 9A shows the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol). The big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) uses the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) to determine the big hit type. Referenced when making a decision.

  FIG. 9B illustrates a big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol). The big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) uses the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed) to determine the big hit type. Referenced when making a decision.

  FIG. 9C illustrates a small hit type determination table. The small hit type determination table is referred to when determining the small hit type, regardless of which of the first winning winning port and the second starting winning port the game ball is in the pending memory. .

  FIG. 9-8 is an explanatory diagram showing the jackpot types in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, the big hit types are big hits A and big hits D in which the time saving control is not executed after the big hit game state ends, and big hits B, big hits C and big hits E in which the time saving control is executed after the big hit game state ends. Is set. Of these jackpots A to E, jackpot C and jackpot E are regarded as the most advantageous jackpots for the player, and jackpot A and jackpot D are regarded as the most disadvantageous jackpots for the player. Also, the big hit E is a big hit that is more advantageous than the big hit D, so that the small hit B is a smaller hit that is more advantageous than the small hit A.

  Among these jackpots A to E, the jackpot A is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) to change the first winning port to the second state advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the big hitting game state of the big hit A, the time-saving control is not executed. The big hit B is a big hit that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) for changing the first big winning opening to the second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the big hit game state of the big hit B is completed, the time-saving control is executed until the big hit occurs again until the 20 special figure games are executed or the 20 special figure games are executed. The big hit C is a big hit that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) for changing the first big winning opening to the second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the big hit game state of the big hit C is completed, the time-saving control is executed until a big hit occurs again until 100 special figure games are executed or 100 special figure games are executed. The big hit D is a big hit that is repeatedly executed four times (so-called four rounds) to change the second big winning opening to the second state advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit D, the time-saving control is not executed. The big hit E is a big hit that is repeatedly executed 14 times (so-called 14 rounds) for changing the second big winning opening to the second state advantageous to the player. Further, after the big hit game state of the big hit E ends, the time-saving control is executed until a big hit occurs again until 100 special figure games are executed or 100 special figure games are executed.

  The jackpot D and the jackpot E have the second jackpot as the opening jackpot to be opened. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpots to be opened for the jackpot D and the jackpot E are as follows. , The first big winning opening. In other words, for the small hit game, the second big winning opening is opened, and for the big hit D and the big hit E based on the occurrence of the V winning during the small hitting game, the big hit game is replaced with the first big winning opening as the big hit game. You only have to open the big winning opening.

  In the time-saving state, the probability of being “the normal figure hit” increases, so that the small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. For this reason, in the time reduction state, a big hit may occur as a result of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, or a big hit may occur due to a V winning during a small hit game, so that the big hit game state is usually It is easy to occur continuously without going through the state, and it becomes a so-called continuous state.

  In the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit B, the number of special figure games for which the time saving control is executed is set to 20, so that a small hit occurs during the 20 special figure games and the game ball The rate of passing through the 3-count switch (the rate at which a gaming ball wins a V during 20 special figure games and a big hit occurs) is set to about 50%. On the other hand, in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit C and the big hit E, the number of special figure games in which the time saving control is executed is set to 100, so that a small hit occurs during the 100 special figure games. The rate at which game balls pass through the third count switch (the rate at which a game ball wins a V during 100 special figure games and a big hit occurs) is set to approximately 100%.

  In this embodiment, five types of jackpots A to E are provided as jackpot types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and six or more jackpot types may be provided. The following types may be provided.

  In the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is “1”, from 0 to 299 of the determination value range of MR2, 0 to 49 are assigned to big hit A, and 50 To 149 are assigned to the big hit B, and 150 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 249 are assigned to the big hit B, 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Also, when the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 149 is assigned to the big hit A, and 150 to 249 is assigned to the big hit B, 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. As described above, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit B or the big hit C at which the time-saving control is executed at the end of the big hit game decreases in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. I am trying to become.

  In the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is “1”, 0 to 29 out of the range of the determination value of MR2 from 0 to 299 are assigned to the big hit A, and 30 -99 are assigned to big hit B, and 100-299 are assigned to big hit C. When the set value is “2”, in the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2, 0 to 69 is assigned to the big hit A, and 70 to 269 is assigned to the big hit B, 270 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. Also, when the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range of MR2 0 to 299, 0 to 199 are assigned to the big hit A, and 200 to 269 are assigned to the big hit B, 270 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. As described above, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, the rate of determining the big hits B and C at which the time saving control is executed at the end of the big hit game is determined in the special figure game of the first special symbol. Is higher than in the case where has occurred, and decreases in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3.

  In the present embodiment, when the set value is 1, the rate of determining the jackpot type to be the big hit C is the highest, then the rate of determining the big hit B is high, and the rate of determining the big hit A is large. The lowest (big hit type determination ratio at set value 1: big hit C> big hit B> big hit A). If the set value is 2, the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot B with the highest determination ratio, then the jackpot A is determined to be higher, and the jackpot C is determined to be the lowest (set value). Jackpot type determination ratio in 2: jackpot B> jackpot A> jackpot C). Further, when the set value is 3, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the jackpot A is the highest, then the ratio of the jackpot B is high, and the ratio of the jackpot C is the lowest. (Small jackpot type determination ratio at set value 3: big jackpot A> big jackpot B> big jackpot C).

  It should be noted that, depending on the set value, there may be one or more jackpot types that have not been determined among the jackpot A, the jackpot B, and the jackpot C. In other words, the fact that the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value that has been set means that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%) or that the specific jackpot type is 100%. Deciding on a percentage is included.

  In the small hit type determination table, when the set value is “1”, in the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the small hit A, and 100 to 299 are small. It is assigned to hit B. When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 149 are assigned to the small hit B, and 150 to 299 are assigned to the small hit B. I have. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 199 are assigned to the small hits A and 200 to 299 are assigned to the small hits B in the range of the determination values of MR2 0 to 299. I have. As described above, when the V winning big hit occurs during the small hit game, the rate of determining the big hit E in which the number of special figure games in which the time saving control is executed after the big hit game is 100 is 20 times. It is configured to be higher than the ratio for determining the big hit D and to be lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3.

  In the present embodiment, when the set value is 1, the small hit B is determined at a higher ratio than the small hit A as the small hit type, so that the V prize occurs during the small hit game. Therefore, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot E is higher than the rate at which the jackpot is determined to be the jackpot D (the jackpot type determination rate due to the V prize at the set value 1: the jackpot E> the jackpot D). When the set value is 2, the small hits A and the small hits B are determined at the same ratio as the small hit types, so that the V prize occurs during the small hit game. The rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot D is equal to the rate determined to be the jackpot E based on the above (the jackpot type determination rate due to the V prize at the set value 2: the jackpot E = the jackpot D). Further, when the set value is 3, the small hit A is determined as a small hit type at a higher ratio than the small hit B, so that the V prize is generated during the small hit game. Thus, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot D is higher than the rate at which the jackpot is determined to be the jackpot E (the jackpot type determination rate by the V prize at the set value 1: the jackpot D> the jackpot E).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a big hit and the determination ratio of the big hit type when the V prize occurs differ according to the set value. In other words, the type of the small hitting game state controlled according to the set value changes, and the type of the big hitting game state controlled when the V winning occurs may change. It has become possible to improve entertainment interests.

  Depending on the set value, there may be a small hit type that is not determined among the small hits A and the small hits B. That is, the difference in the determination rate of the small hit type depending on the set value that is set means that one of the small hit types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), that is, the other small hit type. The determination of the type at a rate of 100% is also included. Further, the determination ratio of the small hit type may be different depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. When the small hit type is determined at a different rate according to the fluctuation special map, there may be a small hit type that is not determined among the small hit A and the small hit B depending on the fluctuation special map. In other words, in order to determine the small hit type at a different rate according to the variation special figure, one of the small hit types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%), that is, the other small hit type is determined. This includes determining at a rate of 100%. At least one of the big hit type and the small hit type may be determined by using the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. The larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be, the more advantageous the player is. The determination rate of the big hit type or the small hit type is not limited to one different according to the set value, and the big hit type or the small hit type may be determined by the same determination ratio for all the set values.

  The gaming ability itself is not limited to the one that does not change regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the gaming ability may be changed according to the setting value that is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is a gaming property (a so-called probability variation loop type) in which the probability variation loops at a rate of 65%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the big hit probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the big hit game ends based on the fact that the gaming ball passes through the third count switch during the big hit game. While the later gaming state is controlled to be a positive change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a gaming property (so-called V-variable type) in which the ratio of the game balls passing through the third count switch during the big hit game varies according to the fluctuation special map. When the set value set to is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game ball passes through the third count switch during the high base (during the time saving control). Or as a game of controlling the jackpot gaming state (so-called one two-kind mixed type) based on the. Furthermore, although the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same as that of 1-3, the big hit probability and the small hit probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1-3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4). When changing the playability in accordance with the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 or 4, the third count switch is used as an effect switch (a switch for executing a predetermined effect every time the game ball passes through the third count switch), When the set value is 2 or 3, the third count switch is used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a positive change state or a big hit game state based on a game ball passing through the third count switch). May be used.

  The ROM 101 stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. The variation pattern determination table is used to determine one of a plurality of types of variation patterns in accordance with the result of the pre-determination. As the variation pattern determination table, a variation pattern determination table for a big hit which is used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “big hit”, and a variation pattern result of “small hit” is determined in advance. A change pattern determination table for big hits to be used when an error occurs, and a change pattern determination table for a loss to be used when it is determined in advance that the fluctuation display result is to be “out”.

  FIG. 9-9 is an explanatory diagram of a large hit variation pattern determination table and a small hit variation pattern determination table. The big hit variation pattern determination table is referred to when a variation display result is determined to be a big hit symbol to determine a variation pattern based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination. The small hit variation pattern determination table is referred to when a variation display result is determined to be a small hit symbol to determine a variation pattern based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination.

  FIG. 9A shows a change pattern determination table for big hit (for big hit A). The big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A) is referred to when the big hit type is big hit A. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for the jackpot A), when the set value is “1”, from 0 to 997 of the determination value range of MR3, the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot is 0 to 300. ), 301 to 800 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 801 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. ing. When the set value is “2”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 351 to 825 are The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is allocated, and the fluctuation pattern of 826 to 997 is allocated to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 400 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 401 to 850 are The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is assigned, and 851 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

  FIG. 9-9 (B) shows a change pattern determination table for big hits (for big hits B and big hits C). The jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C) is referred to when the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for the jackpot B and the jackpot C), when the set value is “1”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot is 0 to 100 in the range of 0 to 997. PB1-1), 101 to 350 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 351 to 997 are the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. Assigned to. When the set value is “2”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 150 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 151 to 450 The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. Further, when the set value is “3”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 201 to 550 are assigned. The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is allocated, and the fluctuation pattern of 551 to 997 is allocated to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

  The variation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit A) and the variation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit B and big hit C) have a normal reach big hit variation pattern (PB1-1) and a super reach α big hit variation pattern (PB1- 2) A predetermined random number in the range of the random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern is assigned as a determination value to each of the fluctuation patterns of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the big hit A is won in the special map game, the rate of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is higher than the rate of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit, In addition, the setting values become lower in the order of 1, 2, and 3. In addition, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special map game, the ratio of determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot determines the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the superreach α jackpot. The ratio is higher than the ratio and is lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. In this embodiment, when the type of the big hit is “big hit B” or “big hit C”, the super reach β is easily determined, and when the big hit type is “big hit A”, the super reach α is determined. The determination value is assigned so as to facilitate the game, and when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player's expectation that the big hit B or the big hit C will be increased. I can do it.

  FIG. 9C illustrates a small hit variation pattern determination table. In the small hit variation pattern determination table, even if the set value is any one of “1”, “2”, and “3”, 0 to 997 of the MR3 determination value range 0 to 997 are small hits. (PC1-1). In the variation pattern determination table for small hits, a predetermined random number in the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Have been. In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as small hit variation patterns. With the setting values “1”, “2”, and “3”, the small hit variation pattern may be determined at a different rate from the plurality of variation patterns.

  FIG. 9-10 is an explanatory diagram of the variation pattern determination table for outliers. The outlier variation pattern determination table is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern based on the variation pattern determination random number MR3 when it is determined that the variation display symbol is a loss symbol.

  FIG. 9-10 (A) shows a variation pattern determination table A for outliers. The outlier variation pattern determination table A is referred to when the number of pending storages is one or less in the low base state in which the time saving control is not performed in the gaming state. In the deviation variation pattern determination table A, the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-1), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), the super reach A predetermined random number in the range of the random pattern MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of the reach β deviation.

  FIG. 9B shows a variation pattern determination table B for outliers. The outlier variation pattern determination table B is referred to when the total number of suspended storages is 2 to 4 in the low base state. In the outlier variation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach outlier variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super-reach α corresponding to the total number of pending storages of 2 to 4 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern can take to the variation pattern of the loss (PA2-2) and the super reach β variation pattern of the loss (PA2-3). I have.

  FIG. 9-10 (C) shows a variation pattern determination table for out-of-position. The outlier variation pattern determination table C is referred to when the total number of pending storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. In the outlier variation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach outlier variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α corresponding to the total number of pending storages of 5 to 8 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range that the random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern can take to the variation pattern of the loss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of the super reach β (PA2-3). I have.

  FIG. 9D shows the outlier variation pattern determination table D. The loss variation pattern determination table D is referred to when the gaming state is the high base state in which the time saving control is performed. In the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2) corresponding to the time reduction control. -2) A predetermined random number in the range of the random pattern value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned as the determination value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β deviation.

  When using the variation pattern determination tables A to D for outliers, the rate of determining the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is higher than that of determining the super-reach variation pattern, and lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. It is becoming. In addition, when using the variation pattern determination tables A to D for outliers, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 out of the determination values is a superreach α deviation variation pattern, and the evaluation values of 901 to 997 are superreach β deviations regardless of the variation pattern determination tables. When the fluctuation display result is not assigned to each fluctuation pattern, that is, the super reach fluctuation pattern is determined by the common determination ratio regardless of the set value, so the super reach fluctuation pattern It is possible to prevent the effect from being reduced due to the fact that the variable display is not executed.

  In addition, the “common determination ratio” refers to a case where the determination ratio is completely the same at different set values (this embodiment) and a case where the determination ratio is the same at different set values (for example, the set value 1 to 3 where the variation ratio of the super reach variation pattern differs by about 1%). If the fluctuation display result is incorrect, it is not limited to the form in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value, and if the fluctuation display result is incorrect, Regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of all fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach and super reach may be the same, or only the determination ratio of any fluctuation pattern of non-reach and normal reach They may be the same. If the fluctuation display result is out-of-position, regardless of the set value, the setting value of both the super-reach α out-of-position fluctuation pattern determination ratio and the super-reach β out-of-position fluctuation pattern determination ratio is set. Regardless, it is not limited to the same form, and if the fluctuation display result is a deviation, only one of the determination ratio of the super reach α deviation fluctuation pattern and the determination ratio of the super reach β deviation deviation pattern is only one. May be the same regardless of the set value. If the fluctuation display result is out-of-position, regardless of the set value, the setting value of both the super-reach α out-of-position fluctuation pattern determination ratio and the super-reach β out-of-position fluctuation pattern determination ratio is set. It is not limited to the same form regardless of the setting, and even when the fluctuation display result is a big hit, the set value at which the fluctuation pattern determination ratio of the super reach big hit is set regardless of the set value Irrespective of. In the case where the fluctuation display result is out of order, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach or the normal reach is not limited to the form different depending on the set value that is set. There may be one or more variation patterns that are not determined among the reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern. The fact that the change ratio of the variation pattern is different depending on the set value that is set means that one of the variation patterns is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%) or that the specific variation pattern is 100%. It is also included that the decision is made. The present invention is not limited to the mode in which the variation pattern is determined using the variation variation determination table for outliers that differs according to the total number of retained storages. The number of retained storages in the special symbol to be varied (for example, the variation display of the first special symbol) Of the first special symbol, and the number of retained memories of the second special symbol when executing the variable display of the second special symbol). May be determined.

  In each outlier variation pattern determination table, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of the numerical values 1 to 3, the superreach outlier variation patterns (PA2-2 and PA2-3) are included. The range of the assigned random numbers is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the miss probability differ according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the fluctuation display is actually executed in the super-reach change pattern (super-reach difference The appearance rate of the fluctuation pattern) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It should be noted that the variation display is not limited to the form in which the rate of execution in the variation pattern of the super-reach loss differs according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In consideration of the loss probability, the fluctuation display may be performed in a super-reach fluctuation pattern at the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 9-11 shows the game control data holding area 150. The game control data holding area 150 is provided in the RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 and serves as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. The game control data holding area 150 includes a first special figure reservation storage section 151A, a second special figure reservation storage section 151B, a general figure reservation storage section 151C, a game control flag setting section 152, and a game control timer setting section. 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155.

  The first special figure holding storage unit 151A stores the holding data related to the variable display of the first special figure on the first special symbol display 4A. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates the winning order (the detection order of game balls) with the first start winning opening with the reservation number, and sets the first start condition by passing (entering) the game ball. Based on the establishment, the CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 or the like a random number value MR1 for determining a fluctuation display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and numerical data indicating a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern. Are stored until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The first starting condition is satisfied when a game ball passes (enters) a first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A to generate a starting winning. The hold data stored in the first special figure holding storage unit 151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure has not been started yet, and the change display result in this special figure game This is suspension information that enables determination of whether or not a big hit will occur based on the (special figure display result).

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B stores the holding data related to the variable display of the second special figure on the second special symbol display 4B. As an example, the second special map holding storage unit 151B associates the winning order (the order of detection of game balls) with the holding number in the second starting winning port and associates the holding number with the holding number to determine the second starting condition by passing (entering) the game ball. Based on the establishment, the CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 or the like a random number value MR1 for determining a fluctuation display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and numerical data indicating a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern. Are stored until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The second starting condition is satisfied when a game ball passes (enters) a second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and a starting winning is generated. The hold data stored in the second special figure holding storage unit 151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure has not been started yet and has been held. This is suspension information that enables determination of whether or not a big hit will occur based on the (special figure display result).

  In addition, the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number. In this case, the opening information indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening may be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

  The general-purpose reservation storage unit 151C stores the reservation information of the general-purpose game that has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 yet, even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure holding storage unit 151C determines the general figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game ball, in association with the holding number in the order in which the game ball passed through the passage gate 41. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting section 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags capable of updating the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags. The game control timer setting section 153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers. The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be provided with a random counter for counting a part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can be updated by software. The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, a random number value that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value. The numerical data indicating each random number value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random number value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or an arithmetic process on all or a part of the numerical data.

  The display of the total of the game balls and the ratio of the accessory on the main board 11 of the present embodiment will be described. The main board 11 has information on the winning of the game, for example, the number of prize balls by winning the first starting winning opening (navel), the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the first big win. The number of prize balls and the total number of prize balls by the prize at the winning opening and the second grand prize opening (attacker) are input, and the number of shot balls are totaled. The display monitor 29 displays the first grand prize opening and the total number of prize balls. The ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls occupied by the prize to the second winning port (attacker), and the number of prize balls by the prize to the second start prize port (denchu) in the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls occupied by winning in the first and second large winning openings (attackers), and the base (%), which is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. Is displayed. The repetition ratio is a percentage of the total number of prize balls occupied by the number of prize balls (the number of continuous character-acquired balls described below) due to prize winning in the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening (attacker). The role ratio is defined as the number of prize balls in the total number of prize balls due to a prize in the second starting prize port (Den Chu) and the number of prize balls in the first prize port and the second prize port (Attacker) ( The following figure shows the ratio of the number of the acquired ball. The base is the ratio of the number of game balls launched to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls (the total number of balls obtained as described below) is based on the number of prize balls by winning in the first and second large winning openings (attackers) and the winning in the second starting winning opening (electric chew). The number of prize balls and prize balls by prize holes (first start prize port, general prize port) other than the first grand prize port, the second grand prize port (attacker) and the second start prize port (denchu). It is the sum of numbers and In addition, the first special winning opening, the second special winning opening (attacker), and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are variable characters, and when the passable width of the game ball is changed, the game ball is won. It is a character whose assumed ratio fluctuates. In addition, the winning opening (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the first winning winning opening, the second winning winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (denchu) is a fixed role, and The passable width of the ball is fixed, and the expected winning ratio of the game ball is a fixed character.

  As for the method of totaling and calculating the information regarding the winning of the game, regarding the connection ratio and the winning ratio, the winning ball by winning the first starting winning opening (navel) and the general winning opening (sode) in the number of winning balls of 6000 pieces. Number (general prize balls), the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (power chew), the number of ordinary power prize balls (power chew prize balls), the first grand prize mouth and the second grand prize The number of special electric prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls), which is the number of prize balls awarded to the mouth (attacker), is totaled. The total is defined as one set, and the connection ratio (%) and the winning combination (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60000 pieces are calculated. The number of prize balls (number of general prize balls), the number of ordinary electric prize balls (number of electric chu prize balls), the number of special electric The number of role prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls) is recorded in a ring buffer provided for each set value, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated for each set. ing. In other words, the storage of 11 sets of 6000 pieces is stored in a considerable amount (for example, for several bytes), and the total ratio (%) and the winning combination (%) of the totals can be calculated. As for the base, the number of launched game balls with respect to the number of 60000 prize balls is totaled. The total is taken as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60,000 prize balls to the number of launched game balls is calculated.

  The display monitor 29 displays the base ratio (%), the combination ratio (%), the total connection ratio (%), the combination ratio (%), and the last calculated 6000 prize balls (6000). The base 1 (%)) and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls can be switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds). That is, six displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to display all, but the number of prize balls by winning in the first starting winning opening (navel) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are counted as the game progresses. The number of prize balls due to a prize, the number of prize balls due to a prize at the first grand prize port and the second grand prize port (attacker) will be changed. Then, for example, if the number of winning balls won after displaying the connection ratio (%) for 6000 pieces is reflected in the winning percentage (%) for 60000 pieces displayed thereafter, for example, There is a possibility that a discrepancy occurs between the repetition ratio (%) and the role ratio (%) for 60000 pieces. Therefore, the number of prize balls by winning the first start winning opening (navel), the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the number of first winning opening and the second winning opening (attacker). If the number of prize balls and the total number of prize balls due to winning are input and totaled at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, a display timing of a connection ratio (%) for 6000 pieces), such a discrepancy is caused. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, a storage area in which information on a game winning is stored is provided for each set value, and a general winning prize ball, a first starting mouth prize ball, a normal electric prize sphere, a special electric prize prize, and the like. The ball, the prize ball total, and the hit total are stored in a storage area (ring buffer) corresponding to the set value. For this reason, the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base in the present embodiment can be individually calculated for each set value.

  In the following, as an example of the calculation method, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls by the prize in the second starting prize port (Den Chu) and the first prize port and the second prize port (attacker). The method of calculating the ratio of the bonuses (ratio (%)) in the case where the number of the bonuses obtained as the sum of the number of the awarded balls by winning is 42000 is described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls refers to the total cumulative number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the number of the accessory acquisition balls refers to the cumulative number of game media paid out when the game media wins the attacker and the electric chew. In addition, the number of continuous bonus item acquisition balls refers to the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning the game media to the attacker. The hit total is the cumulative number of game media hit into the pachinko gaming machine 1 until the number of prize balls reaches 60000. Therefore, the connection ratio can be obtained by the following equation (1). The winning combination can be obtained by the following equation (2). The base can be obtained by the following equation (3).

  Connection ratio = [Number of consecutive bonus balls acquired / Number of total acquired balls] x 100 (1)

  Role ratio = [(number of consecutive acquired ball + number of acquired ball) / total acquired number] × 100 (2)

  Base = [60000 (total number of prize balls) / total hits] × 100 (3)

  When the total number of prize balls is 60000 and the number of obtained bonus balls is 42,000, the bonus ratio is obtained as 0.70 (three digits after the decimal point are cut off) by dividing 42,000 by 60000. However, since the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot perform calculations below the decimal point, calculations using the following method are required.

  First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of the accessory acquisition balls is multiplied by 100 to be 4200000. Then, this 4200000 is divided by 60000. This requires 70 as the quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when calculating the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, the calculation result may be multiplied by 1000.

  Next, a second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to be 600. Then, 42000 is divided by the 600. This requires 70 as the quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two decimal places can be obtained. Here, when calculating the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, the calculation result may be divided by 1000.

  In the above example, the total number of prize balls is 60000, but a three-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate a long-lived bonus ratio. That is, in this example, 00EA60h is stored in the 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A410h is also stored in the storage area of 3 bytes for the number of the obtained ball. The microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform an operation between values of a maximum of 2 bytes. Therefore, the lower one byte may be truncated to facilitate the operation.

  A third calculation method which is performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the lower one byte 60h is rounded down to 00EA60h of the total number of prize balls, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, 234 is calculated in decimal notation. Similarly, the lower one byte of 10h is discarded from the 00A410h of the number of the acquired ball, and the number of the acquired ball is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation. Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 78%. In the third calculation method, while the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is facilitated, an error of + 12% occurs. However, when both the total number of prize balls and the number of winning ball obtained are 10 times, the error is + 1%. That is, as the period for calculating the accessory ratio becomes longer, the error is reduced and approximates the original value.

  For example, assuming that the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of acquired accessory balls is 19876, the calculation of the winning combination (%) is performed by dividing 34876 by 19321 and dividing the number by 34321 to calculate the ratio. 19876/34321 = 0.57912... It is calculated that the winning combination (%) is about 57.9%. When an operation is performed in the game control microcomputer 100, the calculation at the decimal point must be avoided. In the division of 19876/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100, and the decimal point is truncated to be 19876/343 = 57.9475. Since the value after the decimal point is rounded down, it is calculated to be 57% of the duty ratio (%) and is displayed on the display monitor 29. In this example, the value calculated by the accurate calculation is different from the value calculated by the accurate calculation on the display. There will be no.

  The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (the value other than the value of the most significant bit is 0), and the value with the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of accessory acquired balls are 32799. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when it is replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327 = 100.3%, resulting in + 0.3% error. When the calculation is performed with the decimal point truncated, for example, the accurate value is 69.9%, and when the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, the display is changed from 69% to 70% by 1%. Although it is conceivable that an error of% is displayed, the combination ratio (%) (or the connection ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error on the display of the error of 1%.

  In addition, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of obtained balls is divided by 100, so that the calculation cannot be performed if the total number of obtained balls is less than 100. Further, when the value is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. If it is less than 10,000, the error may exceed 1% and may be even larger. That is, the error increases as the total number of acquired balls decreases. Therefore, until the total number of acquired balls equal to or more than a specific number (for example, 32768 which is the minimum value of 16 bits) is counted by the counter, the display ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are not displayed on the display monitor. Even if the display is performed, the possibility that the error may be large may be notified by emitting a dedicated LED, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

  The storage area in which the information on the winning of the game is stored may not be initialized when the clear switch AK001 or the like is operated, and may be continuously stored. This storage area may include a ring buffer, and may constitute a 10-set total buffer, a total prize ball buffer, or the like in which information relating to winning of a game stored in a ring buffer provided with 10 counters of up to 2 bytes is totaled. . It should be noted that the checksum of the stored value is calculated and initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected. Initialization of the storage area for storing information on winning of a game when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of consecutive bonus balls obtained is larger than the value of the number of balls obtained. Processing may be performed. Further, an error display, a warning display, or the like may be performed without performing the initialization processing, or an error display or a warning display may be performed, or the initialization processing may be performed after the display.

  When the calculation of the connection ratio or the duty ratio has to be performed again, for example, when the calculation of the connection ratio or the duty ratio has an obstacle, the display monitor clear switch different from the clear switch AK001 is operated. By doing so, the data used for the connection ratio or the combination stored in the nonvolatile storage device such as the RAM 102 or the flash memory may be cleared. The display monitor clear switch only needs to be arranged on the back side surface of the game board 2 at a position, for example, a predetermined position of the power supply board 17, which cannot be easily operated by game room attendants or the like. When the display monitor clear switch is operated, a display monitor clear signal different from the clear signal is transmitted to the main board 11.

  The substrate case 201 is formed of a material having a light-transmitting property, and the main substrate 11 and the display monitor 29 are visible. The board case 201 has a not-shown hole through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat radiating hole for releasing heat of electric components of the main board 11. The display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat radiating hole is not directly in front. Therefore, the visibility of the display monitor 29 is not blocked by the heat radiating holes. Here, “directly in front” means directly in front of the main board 11 as a viewpoint, and means between the main board 11 and a staff member of a game arcade who wants to view the main board 11.

  The display monitor 29 displays a winning ratio (%), a link ratio (%), and a base (%) on seven segments, and switches and displays each value every predetermined period (for example, every five seconds). I do. In this case, for example, while the winning ratio (%) is displayed for 5 seconds, an event occurs in which a game medium newly wins on the electric chute or the attacker, and the value calculated accordingly changes the ratio ( %), The value of the winning combination (%) may be different from the value of the consecutive winning (%). For this reason, it is preferable that the combination ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are calculated within the same interrupt and the calculated values are sequentially displayed. If the numerical value that can be displayed in seven segments is two digits (for example, when two seven segments are provided), the display cannot be performed with 100% as 100. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. In the display monitor 29, a numerical value can be displayed in the lower two digits. However, in this case, the numerical value may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, a numerical value may be displayed in a part of the upper two digits under a specific condition. It is to be noted that the present invention is not limited to the form in which the sensors provided in each of the attacker and the electric chew detect that the game medium has won, and the total number of award balls is individually counted based on the detection result. Using the sensor provided after the discharge path from which the game media having won the game media and the game media having won the electric chute are discharged is merged, based on the detection result, the number of the ball for obtaining the accessory and the number of the ball for continuously obtaining the accessory May be counted.

  The main board 11 is provided on the back side of the game board 2. On the back side of the game board 2, in addition to the main board 11, peripheral boards such as the effect control board 12 are also provided. The RAM 102 on the main board 11 includes a gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, a third general winning number counter, and a fourth general winning number counter. A general winning number counter and a large winning number counter are provided. Note that the number of winnings of the first winning port and the second winning port (attacker) is not limited to the form in which the number of winnings is counted by the winning counter, but the number of winnings in the first winning port is counted. A first large winning number counter and a second large winning number counter for counting the number of winnings in the second large winning opening are separately provided, and the number of winnings in the first large winning opening and the number in the second large winning opening are counted. The number of winnings may be individually counted, and the respective winnings may be summed to be the number of winnings to the attacker.

  The gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start port switch 22A. The second start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 22B. The first general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch 26A. The second general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second general winning opening switch 26B. The third general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the third general winning opening switch 26C. The fourth general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 26D. The large winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23 and the second count switch 24A.

  FIG. 9-12 shows the arrangement and display contents of the display monitor 29. The main board 11 is housed in a board case 201. The caulking pin 11B is attached to the board case 201. With the provision of the caulking pins 11B, the main board 11 is completely sealed in the board case 201, thereby preventing improper acts on the main board 11. The board case 201 is a swaged board case (hereinafter also referred to as a “swaging board case”). The display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11. Further, a sealing seal 11S for proving that the main substrate 11 has been sealed is attached to the substrate case 201. The sealing seal 11 </ b> S is affixed, for example, across the removed portion of the board case 201. The sealing seal 11S is arranged at a position distant from the main substrate 11, and is arranged at a position different from a position where visibility of the display monitor 29 is blocked, such as directly in front of the display monitor 29. Thus, the display monitor 29 is arranged at a position that is not hidden by the sealing seal 11S.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, the display monitor 29 includes a first display unit 29A, a second display unit 29B, a third display unit 29C, a fourth display unit 29D, and a fifth display unit 29E. . Each of the first display unit 29A to the fifth display unit 29E is composed of seven segments composed of seven segments that draw the character “8” and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 29A to the fifth display unit 29E can be turned on and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white, and the like. In addition, these colors can be displayed in different colors or so-called rainbows while being changed in a very short cycle.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, items of display Nos. 1 to 6 are displayed on the display monitor 29. The set values (1 to 3) totaled are displayed on the first display unit 29A of the first digit, and the total period is displayed on the second display unit 29B of the second digit and the third display unit 29C of the third digit. The numerical value is displayed as a percentage on the fourth display unit 29D at the fourth digit and the fifth display unit 29E at the fifth digit. In display No. 1, a short-term connection ratio is displayed, and in display No. 2, a short-term winning ratio is displayed. In the display No. 3, the total ratio is displayed, and in the display No. 4, the total winning combination is displayed. Display No. 5 displays the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls, and display No. 6 displays the base (base 2) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls. Is done. Here, the short term means a period in which the number of awarded balls (acquired balls) is 6,000. The period in which the total sum is obtained means the total period after the calculation of the ratio and the winning ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the ratio and the winning ratio is once reset. In the above example, the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base are calculated without depending on the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the repetition ratio may be a percentage of the total number of prize balls occupied by the number of prize balls due to winning in the special winning opening during the jackpot game state. The winning combination is defined as a ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of prize balls due to winning in the second starting winning opening in the high base state and the number of winning balls due to winning in the large winning opening in the jackpot game state. Is also good. Further, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

  When the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed, the second display unit 29B and the second display unit 29C are displayed. “Y7.” Is displayed on the display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the short-term ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, and the short-term role ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the fourth display portion 29D and the fifth display portion 29E display the short-term role ratio as a percentage (% display). When the total cumulative connection ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, “A6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, “A7.” Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, and the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed. When displayed, the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E display the total cumulative combination ratio as a percentage (% display). When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, “bL.” Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit is displayed. “B6.” Is displayed on the display 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In the fourth display section 29D and the fifth display section 29E, the total total winning combination is displayed as a percentage (% display).

  In calculating the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base, the main board 11 is used to calculate the first special winning opening and the second special winning opening (attacker), the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening. , The total number of game balls that have entered the fourth general winning opening and the number of game balls that have discharged from the outlet are calculated. In the main process, the CPU 103 executes the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, the first count switch 23, the second count switch 24A, and the first general winning opening switch 26A to the fourth general port switch. A switch process for confirming the state of each of the winning opening switch 26D and the discharge opening switch 70 (the presence or absence of a detection signal) is performed. In the switch process, it is specified which entry area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. When the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passage number counter is added, and when the detection signal is output from the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, The value of the first start winning number counter and the value of the second start winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 23, the value of the large winning number counter is added, and the first general winning opening switch 26A is added. When the detection signal is output from the second general winning opening switch 26B, the third general winning opening switch 26C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 26D, the first general winning number counter, the second general winning number counter, The value of the third general winning number counter and the fourth general winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the outlet switch 70, the value of the hit number counter is added. , Counts the entry number of game balls (winning number of game balls to each winning hole) to each entry area. The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102. As described above, the step of counting the number of game balls entering each entry area is also executed in a series of processing for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each entry area (switch state confirmation processing). Switch processing), it is possible to count the number of game balls entering each entry area without running a separate counting program, that is, without causing a problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in the number of execution programs. It has become.

  FIG. 9-13 shows a storage area for storing the number of winning balls for each winning opening. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of prize balls due to winning in each winning opening based on the total number of game balls winning in each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning opening. Let it. The number of prize balls by winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out by one prize to the winning opening by the number of winnings to the winning opening. The number of prize balls obtained by winning game balls is determined in advance for each winning port. The number of prize balls for each of the prize holes to be classified includes a general prize hole prize ball (a prize ball for winning from the first general prize port to the fourth general prize port (Sode)), a first start prize port prize ball (first prize hole). The number of awarded balls in the 1st winning prize opening (navel), the prize ball in the normal electric prize prize ball (prize ball in the prize in the electric chew), and the special electric prize ball (prize ball in the prize in the attacker) is there. The RAM 102 also stores the total number of prize balls and the number of hit game balls. Although the CPU 103 separately counts the number of game balls won to the general winning opening and the number of game balls won to the first starting winning opening, the number of game balls winning to the general winning opening and the first starting number are also counted. The number of game ball winnings to the winning opening may be summed up. Further, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the number of prize balls of the first starting winning prize ball are separately calculated. The number of prize balls may be calculated together.

  The RAM 102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of awarded balls and the number of hits. The ring buffer includes ten first storage areas to tenth storage areas each having a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of winning balls in each winning opening for each of the 6,000 winning balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (up to 2 bytes). The active buffer has a zero storage area including a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of prize balls by winning in each winning opening for each of the 6,000 prize balls. In the 0th storage area, the number of prize balls for each winning opening that increases as the game progresses is added. The eleven storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin. Further, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area for each of the winning prize holes, the total number of prize balls (for 10 sets) and the number of hits stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area, and the total sum. I have. The storage area for the total of 10 sets and the total total is composed of a counter of a maximum of 3 bytes. Therefore, 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data can be stored. I can remember.

  The RAM 102 stores a duty combination ratio storage area for storing 10 sets and a total cumulative combination ratio and a connection ratio, a base for 10 sets (base 2), and a base for the previous 10 sets (base 1). And a base storage area. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the winning combination and the total ratio of the 10 sets and the total total based on the number of prize balls based on the winning number of the game balls to each of the winning ports of the 10 sets and the total total. In addition, the combination ratio and the total ratio are stored in a ratio combination ratio storage area. Each of the connection ratio storage areas for storing the combination ratios and the connection ratios of the 10 sets and the total total is composed of a counter of a maximum of 1 byte. When the combination ratio and the connection ratio of the 10 sets and the total total are stored in, for example, integers, they can be stored with a margin by a maximum 1-byte counter. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the base of the 10 sets based on the number of hits of the game balls to the winning holes of the 10 sets for each winning opening, and calculates the base of the calculated 10 sets (base 2) and the last time. The base (base 1) calculated from the number of hits of the game balls to the winning holes for each of the ten sets for each winning port is stored in the base storage area. When the bases 1 and 2 are stored as integers, for example, they can be stored with a margin by a maximum 1-byte counter.

  FIG. 9-14 shows a memory map of the CPU 103 on the main board 11. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing a built-in register, the ROM 101, the RAM 102, and the like. The address / data signal lines of the ROM 101 are allocated to a built-in ROM area in a ROM area of a memory space (in the present embodiment, 0000H to 2FBFH, of which 0000H to 2FBFH; 2FC0H to 2FFFH are program management areas). Data is read from the ROM 101 by specifying this ROM area. In the present embodiment, the ROM area is managed by dividing it into eight areas of a first area to an eighth area, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H. Address / data signal lines of the built-in register are allocated to a built-in register area (FE00H to FEBFH in the present embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads data from the built-in register and transfers data to the register via the built-in register area. Is written. Address / data signal lines of the RAM 102 are allocated to a built-in RAM area which is an RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in the present embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 designates this RWM area to read data from the RAM 102 Write data to the RAM 102. The other areas of the memory space (in the present embodiment, 3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, and FEC0H to FFFFH) are unused areas.

  FIG. 9-15 shows an RWM area serving as a built-in RAM area. The built-in RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 includes a RAM control area, an unused area, a RAM data area, and other areas. The storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area includes instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction. The data for the control program to be executed (which may be simply referred to as control program data) is temporarily stored. Reference data (for example, various lottery data) referred to by the control program is temporarily stored in a storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area.

  The data used to display the reams and the ratios are temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area or the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area is provided with a storage area for storing the total sum of the number of winning balls for each winning opening and a storage area for the total hand combination ratio. The storage areas of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas include an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having a 1st storage area to a 10th storage area, and the number of prize balls (for 10 sets) for each winning opening. ), And a storage area for 10 sets of connection ratio. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area, data having different subroutine start addresses are stored. One byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address in the built-in RAM area, and each data (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data, management data) stores one byte. If the data has more bytes (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored for each byte in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. .

  FIG. 9-16 shows an example of display control on the display monitor 29. The main board 11 controls the display monitor 29 to display the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base. On the display monitor 29, a plurality of items are sequentially displayed.

  FIG. 9A is a time chart showing a mode of a display change on the display monitor 29. When the display on the display monitor 29 is started, first, the short-term ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed. The display of the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. When the display of the display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term role ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed in red. When the display of the display No. 2 is continued for 5 seconds, the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed in red. When the display of the display No. 3 is continued for 5 seconds, the total cumulative ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed in red. When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed. The display of the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed in red. When the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. The display of the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed in red. Then, when the display of the display No. 6 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed. Thereafter, from the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 to the base 2 of the display No. 6, each display is sequentially changed and displayed every 5 seconds. As for the display color, only the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is green, and the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 to the base 2 of the display No. 5 are red. In this manner, the display monitor 29 switches and displays the short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, base 1 and base 2 every 5 seconds.

  FIG. 9-16 (B1) shows a case where the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. In this case, the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character “y” is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. In addition, the short-term ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the short-term connection ratio is 41%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character “1.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  FIG. 9-16 (B2) shows a case where the short-term role ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character “y” is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the short-term winning ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the short-term role ratio is 63%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character “3.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  FIG. 9-16 (B3) shows a case where the total cumulative connection ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. In this case, the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character “A” is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. The fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E display the total cumulative connection ratio. For example, when the total cumulative connection ratio is 58%, the character “5.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  FIG. 9-16 (B4) shows a case where the total total winning combination of display No. 4 is displayed. In this case, the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character “A” is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. The fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E display the total total winning combination. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character “6.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  FIG. 9-16 (B5) shows a case where the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed. In this case, the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character “b” is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character “L.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. The base 1 calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character “0.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  FIG. 9-16 (B6) shows a case where the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character “b” is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. The base 2 calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character “2” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  The display of the short-term ratio, the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 can be sequentially changed for each set value based on the operation of the display changeover switch 30. I have. For example, when the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is “1”, the operation of the display changeover switch 30 is performed. As a result, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to “2”, and the short-term ratio, the short-term position ratio, the total cumulative ratio, and the like are displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. The display of the total cumulative winning combination, base 1 and base 2 is changed to a display corresponding to the case where the set value is “2”. When the short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is “2”, the display changeover switch 30 is operated to The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to “3”, and the short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative total displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E are displayed. The display of the winning combination, base 1 and base 2 is changed to a display corresponding to the case where the set value is “3”. When the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative connection ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed when the set value is “3”, the display changeover switch 30 is operated. The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to "1", and the short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative total displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E are displayed. The display of the winning combination, base 1 and base 2 is changed to a display corresponding to the case where the set value is “1”.

  The display monitor 29 is not limited to the form in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at each set value can be displayed. Only any two numerical values may be displayed. The present invention is not limited to a form in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, are calculated, and the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 29. The history of the number of awarded balls may be displayed on the display monitor 29 without calculating the winning combination and the base. On the display monitor 29, only the short-term ratio is displayed in red, and the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are not limited to those displayed in green. The short-term duty ratio, the total cumulative duty ratio and the total cumulative duty ratio are displayed in the same color, and the short-term duty ratio, the short-term duty ratio, the total cumulative duty ratio and the same as the total cumulative duty ratio are different for base 1 and base 2. It may be displayed in color.

  FIG. 9-17 shows an execution example of updating in the active buffer and the ring buffer. When the total prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reach the predetermined capacity of 6000, the main board 11 updates the storage in the 0th to 10th storage areas in the ring buffer. Further, the storage unit stores the sum and total cumulative storage area for 10 sets and the combination and combination ratio storage area for storing the combination and total ratio of the 10 sets and total. At this time, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer, and the numerical values stored in the first to ninth storage areas of the ring buffer are respectively stored in the second storage area. Move from the storage area to the tenth storage area. For example, the prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area are “27”, “81”, “120”, “36”, “225”, “87”, “66”, “117”, and “45”, respectively. It is "21". At this time, when the total prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reach 6000, the prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 1st storage area to the 10th storage area are respectively set to “27”, “81” and “120”. "36" "225" "87" "66" "117" "45" "21". Accordingly, the number of award balls in the zeroth storage area is set to “0”, and the number of award balls in the tenth storage area is deleted. When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area, the stored number of prize balls may be deleted once, and then the new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new prize ball number may be stored by overwriting the stored prize ball number.

(Explanation of game control related to other features)
FIG. 9-18 is a flowchart showing an example of a main process executed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 in this embodiment. This main processing should just be able to be performed instead of the game control main processing. In the main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step Sa1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step Sa2), and a stack pointer designated address is set to the stack pointer (step Sa3). After initialization of the built-in device (initialization of CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) (step Sa4), the RAM 102 can be accessed. (Step Sa5). In the interrupt mode 2, an address synthesized from a value (1 byte) of a specific register (I register) built in the CPU 103 and an interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is: This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the clear switch AK001 is on based on the clear signal which is the output signal of the clear switch AK001 (step Sa6). If the clear switch AK001 is off, it is determined whether or not the power-off detection processing has been executed (step Sa7). If the power-off detection process has been executed, it is determined whether or not the execution result of the parity check is normal (step Sa8). If the check result is normal, the start address of the backup setting table is set as a pointer (step Sa41), and an initial value is set in the work area based on the contents (step Sa42). Thereby, the stored contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the time of the power failure regarding the progress of the game are restored.

  When the power failure is restored in step Sa42, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 51 is on based on the lock switch signal which is the output signal of the lock switch 51 (step AKS001). If the lock switch 51 is on in step AKS001, the setting check process is executed (step AKS002), whereby the set value can be checked. In the setting confirmation processing, it is possible to confirm the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying on the display monitor 29. When the lock switch AK002 is off in step AKS001 or after executing the setting confirmation process in step AKS002, the process proceeds to step Sa14. When the lock switch AK002 is off in step AKS001, a command 9200H serving as a power failure recovery designation command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 182.

  When the execution of the setting confirmation process is started in step AKS002, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is entered, and the setting confirmation from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is started. Command 9400H, which is a command, is transmitted. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be stopped may be set. When the game is stopped, the firing of the game ball by the operation of the hit ball operation handle 30, the detection of the game ball by various switches, and the like are stopped, and the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, The symbol display 20 may be controlled so as to stop displaying a lost symbol or the like, or to perform a display corresponding to a game stop state different from the lost symbol. When the execution of the setting confirmation processing in step AKS001 ends, the setting confirmation state and the game stop state accompanying the setting confirmation state end, and a command 9401H serving as a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Is done.

  If the clear switch AK001 is on in step Sa6, if the power cut-off detection process has not been executed in step Sa7, or if the check result is not normal in step Sa8, the predetermined RAM is cleared. The process is executed to clear data other than the set values stored in the backup storage area of the RAM 102 (step Sa9). The storage area in which the information regarding the winning of the game is stored may not be cleared in step Sa9. Subsequent to step Sa9, the start address of the initialization setting table is set as a pointer (step Sa10), and an initial value is set in the work area based on the contents (step Sa11). Thereby, the storage contents regarding the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are initialized. If the clear switch AK001 is turned on in step Sa6, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) in steps Sa9 and Sa10, so that the clear switch AK001 detects an operation of being pressed on. In addition, an operation related to initialization of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be detected.

  When the stored contents are initialized in step Sa11, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 51 is on based on the lock switch signal (step Sa12). If the lock switch 51 is ON in step Sa12, the setting change processing is executed (step Sa13), whereby the set value can be changed. In the setting change process, it is possible to check the change status of the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying on the display monitor 29. When the lock switch 51 is off in step Sa12, or after executing the setting change process in step Sa13, the process proceeds to step Sa14.

  When the lock switch 51 is off in step Sa12, a command 9000H serving as a RAM clear notification command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Note that the present invention is not limited to the mode in which the setting change process is executed on condition that the lock switch 51 is turned on. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changeable.

  When the execution of the setting change process is started in step Sa13, the setting change state is set as a change permission state in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed. Then, a command 9100H serving as a setting change start command is transmitted. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in the game stop state, as in the setting confirmation state. When the execution of the setting change process in step Sa13 ends, the setting change state and the accompanying game stop state end, and a command 93XXH serving as a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Is done. In addition, in addition to the case where the clear switch AK001 is on, the setting is performed if the lock switch 51 is on when the power-off inspection process is not executed or the execution result of the parity check is not normal. The setting change process is not limited to the mode in which the change process is executed. The setting change process may be executed when the lock switch 51 is ON only when the RAM 102 is cleared when the clear switch AK001 is ON.

  After that, the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is read (step Sa14), and the value is used as the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the random number circuit 104 is initialized by the random number circuit setting process (step Sa15). Further, a setting is made to generate a periodic timer interrupt every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step Sa16). Then, the interrupt prohibition setting (step Sa17), the display random number update processing (step Sa18), the initial value random number update processing (step Sa19), and the interrupt permission setting (step Sa20) are repeatedly executed.

  The CPU 103 performs a special symbol normal process in the special symbol process process, based on a display result determination table corresponding to the set value set and numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for variable display result determination. It is determined (predetermined) whether or not to display the change display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol as "big hit" or "small hit" before the change display result is derived and displayed. Further, when executing the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is determined by using a variation pattern determination table corresponding to the set values and numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination. May be determined. As described above, by determining the variable display result at a different ratio according to the set value, the game can be advanced so that the advantage for the player is different.

  In the present embodiment, when the clear switch AK001 is turned on in step Sa6 of the main processing, the storage contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) in steps Sa9 to Sa11, and then in steps Sa12 and Sa13. Although the setting value can be changed, the present invention is not limited to this. The storage contents of the RAM 102 may be initialized (cleared) after the setting value changeable state ends. . That is, if the clear switch AK001 is on in step Sa6, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 51 is on in step Sa12, and if it is off, the process proceeds to steps Sa9 to Sa11. The stored contents are initialized (cleared). On the other hand, if the lock switch 51 is turned on in step Sa12, a setting change process is executed in step Sa13, and after the process is completed, steps Sa9 to Sa9 are performed. The process may proceed to Sa11. For example, when the RAM clear notification command is transmitted in response to the initialization (clearing) of the storage content of the RAM 102, the initialization control board 12 starts the initialization notification in response to the reception of the RAM clear notification command. Sometimes. Therefore, if steps Sa9 to Sa11 are executed before step Sa13, when the setting change processing is executed in step Sa13 and the setting value can be changed, the initialization notification is executed and the setting is changed. There is a possibility that the change of the value may be hindered. On the other hand, the storage contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) in steps Sa9 to Sa11 after the setting change processing in step Sa13 is completed, so that the initialization notification and the like are started after the change of the set values is completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent trouble in changing the set value.

  FIG. 9-19 shows a display mode of the display monitor 29 in the setting change process of step Sa13. As shown in FIG. 9A, the power switch AK002 is operated by a staff at a game arcade or the like when the connection ratio, the duty ratio, the base, and the like are displayed on the display monitor 29, and power is supplied by shutting off the power. When the display is stopped, the display on the display monitor 29 is ended as shown in FIG. Thereafter, when the staff at the game arcade presses the clear switch AK001 and operates the power switch AK002 while switching the lock switch 51 on, the power supply is started by turning on the power. As shown in FIG. 19C, on the display monitor 29, the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the first display unit 29A. When the setting changeover switch 52 is pressed by a person in charge of a game arcade or the like in a state where the set value is displayed, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is sequentially updated each time the operation is detected. To display. For example, when the pressing operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, if “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the value is updated to “2”, and if “2” is displayed, the value is changed to “3”. It is sufficient that the display is updated to "1" if "3" is displayed, so that the display of the first display unit 29A can be sequentially and cyclically updated between "1" to "3". Thereafter, when the lock switch 51 is pressed by a staff member of the game arcade or the like, the operation is detected, and the set value displayed on the first display unit 29A is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 (update storage). I do. At this time, by blinking the first display unit 29A, a staff member of the game hall or the like notifies that a new set value has been stored so as to be recognizable.

  When the setting change process is performed in step Sa13, the storage content of the RAM 102 has been initialized in step Sa9. Therefore, when the setting value is changed, the hold storage based on the hold data and the like in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B is deleted. When a switching operation for turning off the lock switch 51 is performed by a staff member of the game arcade or the like, the operation is detected, and the setting change process ends. The CPU 103 is in a state where a game can be played by executing the processing after step Sa14 in the main processing. As a result, for example, it becomes possible to execute a variation display result, a jackpot type, a lottery determination lottery determination, a prize ball payout, and the like. In the setting change process, the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 29 is not limited to the form in which the stored value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed. A predetermined set value such as “1” or “3”, which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player, may be displayed.

  In the setting change processing, the control for sequentially updating and displaying the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A of the display monitor 29 is limited to a mode of updating each time a pressing operation of the setting switch 52 is detected. Instead, for example, each time the pressing operation of the clear switch AK001 is detected, it may be sequentially updated and displayed. For example, when the clear switch AK001 is pressed on the display monitor 29 in a state where the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the first display unit 29A, “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A. "Is displayed, the display is updated to" 2 ", if" 2 "is displayed, the display is updated to" 3 ", and if" 3 "is displayed, the display is updated to" 1 ". It suffices if the display of the display unit 29A can be sequentially and cyclically updated between "1" to "3". In this case, the clear switch AK001 used for initializing the storage content of the RAM 102 can be commonly used for changing the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in manufacturing cost due to an increase in the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 9-20 shows a display mode of the display monitor 29 in the setting confirmation processing in step AKS002. As shown in FIG. 9A, the power switch AK002 is operated by a game room attendant or the like when the connection ratio, the duty ratio, the base, and the like are displayed on the display monitor 29, and the power is supplied by shutting off the power. When the display is stopped, the display on the display monitor 29 is ended as shown in FIG. After that, the power supply is started by turning on the power by operating the power switch AK002 while switching on the lock switch 51 without operating the clear switch AK001 by the staff of the game arcade without pressing the clear switch AK001. As shown in 9-20 (C), the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the first display unit 29A on the display monitor 29. In a state where the set value is displayed, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A cannot be updated and displayed even if the setting changeover switch 52 is pressed by a staff member of the game arcade or the like. Thereafter, when a switching operation for turning off the lock switch 51 is performed by a staff member of the game arcade or the like, the operation is detected, and the setting confirmation process ends. The CPU 103 is in a state where a game can be played by executing the processing after step Sa14 in the main processing. As a result, for example, it becomes possible to execute a variation display result, a jackpot type, a lottery determination lottery determination, a prize ball payout, and the like.

  As described above, the display monitor 29 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can display information relating to the game value that enables confirmation of the adjustment of the number of prize balls after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. The display monitor 29 can display information of a set value for proceeding the game so that the advantage for the player is changed by changing the probability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the big hit game state. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a display device for displaying the set values separately from a display device for displaying information on the game value, so that it is possible to prevent an increase in the manufacturing cost due to an increase in the device configuration in the pachinko gaming machine 1. it can.

  In the present embodiment, the display monitor 29 is used to display the set values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and to display the connection ratio, the ratio, the base, and the like. The present invention is not limited to this. The display of the connection ratio, the winning combination, the base, and the like using the display monitor 29 is performed, and the setting value is displayed using the setting display unit different from the display monitor 29. Is also good. This makes it possible to clearly separate the control for displaying the connection ratio, the duty ratio, the base and the like using the display monitor 29 and the control for displaying the set values using the setting display unit. Processing by a control program or the like can be dispersed and simplified, and the control load can be reduced. As described above, when the setting display unit different from the display monitor 29 is used, the setting display unit may be disposed on a substrate different from the substrate on which the display monitor 29 is disposed, or the display monitor 29 is disposed. The setting display unit may be arranged on a substrate common to the substrate.

(Explanation of Modifications Related to Configuration and Game Control in Other Features)
FIG. 9-21 shows a display mode of the display monitor 29 in a modification in which the setting change process can be performed during the game. The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to a form that can be changed when the power is turned on, and the change of the set value may be executable during the game. In this case, after the CPU 103 starts the processing after step Sa16 in the main processing, the game machine frame 3 is opened by the staff of the game arcade, etc., and the clear switch AK001 and the switching operation of turning on the lock switch 51 are performed. Are pressed, the operation is detected, and the display monitor 29 displays the current set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the first display unit 29A. When the setting changeover switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 is pressed down by a staff member of the game arcade or the like in a state where the set value is displayed, the operation is detected and displayed on the first display unit 29A. Update and display numerical values sequentially. Then, when the lock switch 51 is pressed by a staff member of the game arcade or the like, the operation is detected, and the set value displayed on the first display unit 29A is set as a new set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Are stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102.

  The set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is limited to a form that can be changed when the power is turned on, based on the detection of the operation of switching on the lock switch 51 and the detection of the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 on. Instead, it may be changeable at the time of turning on the power based on at least the detection of the operation of switching on the lock switch 51. For example, even when there is no detection of the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 on when the power is turned on, the storage contents of the RAM 102 are not initialized (cleared) based on the detection of the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on. The settings stored in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed based on, for example, restoring the stored contents at the time of the power failure and detecting the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 on. As described above, even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not initialized by initializing (clearing) the storage contents of the RAM 102 with the start of power supply upon power-on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the time of power-on is not used. Control for changing the set value that has been set may be performed.

  When a new set value is stored, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, the special figure on-hold storage, the general-purpose on-hold storage, the game control flag setting unit 152, the game control timer setting unit 153, the game control counter Various flags and data stored in the setting unit 154, the game control buffer setting unit 155, and the like may be deleted. As described above, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, a change in the set value causes a change in the display result to become a big hit, and a new hold memory is generated. Can be prevented from being released (the occurrence of a normal drawing hit), and the fluctuation display result during execution can be prevented from unduly becoming a big hit. Further, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, the special winning opening is closed when the big hit game is being played, or the normal variable winning prize ball device 6B is closed when the normal variable prize ball device 6B is open. This can prevent the player from obtaining inappropriate profit. Further, when the setting change process is interrupted without setting a new setting value, it is possible to prevent the suspension storage from being erased even though a new setting value has not been set. In addition, the present invention is not limited to the mode in which the hold storage is cleared based on the setting of a new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the set value originally set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reset. In such a case, the hold storage may be cleared. The hold storage may be cleared when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the display monitor 29, that is, when the CPU 103 executes the setting change process. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the change of the set value from being accurately reflected on the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the form in which the first special winning opening and the second special winning opening are closed based on the setting of the new setting value, and the display monitor 29 displays the pachinko gaming machine 1 The first special winning opening and the second special winning opening may be closed at the timing when the set value is displayed, that is, when the CPU 103 executes the setting change process. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the change of the set value from being accurately reflected on the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 9-22 shows a display mode in a modification in which the first display unit 29 </ b> A capable of displaying the set value on the display monitor 29 is not provided. The display monitor 29 is provided with five display units from a first display unit 29A to a fifth display unit 29E, and displays the display ratio, the duty ratio, and the base displayed on the second display unit 29B to the fifth display unit 29E. The present invention is not limited to the mode in which the set value is displayed on the first display unit 29A, and it is not necessary to provide a display unit for displaying the connected ratio, the winning combination, and the base set value being displayed. In FIG. 9-22 (A), the display of the display unit 29 corresponding to the second display unit 29B to the fifth display unit 29E displays the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base, and corresponds to the first display unit 29A. The set value is not displayed on the display unit.

  FIG. 9B shows an example of display control of connection ratio, combination ratio, and base in the case where a display unit for displaying a set value is not provided. In this case, the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base at the set value 1 are red, the connection ratio, combination ratio, and the base at the set value 2 are green, and the connection ratio, combination ratio, and the base at the set value 3 are blue. To display. By displaying the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base in different display colors according to the set values, it is possible to easily grasp which set value is the numerical value. In this display control example, similarly to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to switch and display the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base at the set value 1 at intervals of 5 seconds. The switching display at the interval of 5 seconds between the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is changed to the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the switching display at the interval of 5 seconds at the setting value 2. Further, the connection ratio and the combination ratio at the setting value 3 It is only necessary to be able to cyclically change the display to the switching display at an interval of 5 seconds on the base. Alternatively, switching display of the connection ratio at the set value 1, the connection ratio at the set value 2, and the connection ratio at the set value 3 at 5-second intervals, the combination ratio at the set value 1, the combination ratio at the set value 2, and the setting value 3 The switching display of the duty ratio at intervals of 5 seconds and the switching display of the base at the set value 1, the base at the set value 2, and the base at the set value 3 at an interval of 5 seconds are cyclically performed for each operation of the display switch 30. Various changes may be possible.

  The display monitor 29 is not limited to a form in which the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base for each set value can be displayed, but the connection ratio, combination, and combination corresponding to any one of the set values 1 to 3 are set. Only the ratio and the base may be displayed. For example, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are calculated for each of the setting values 1 to 3, and the highest or the lowest value or the longest or shortest measurement time is calculated among the calculated connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. Only the value or the like may be displayed on the display monitor 29. Further, the highest or the lowest value or the value with the longest or shortest measurement time among the calculated connection ratio, combination ratio, and base is set as the initial display on the display monitor 29, and the display changeover switch 30 is operated to change the initial display from the initial display. The display on the display monitor 29 may be switchable to the value of.

  The display monitor 29 displays two or more of the ratio, combination, and base at the set value 1, the combination, combination, and base at the set value 2, and the combination, combination, and base at the set value 3. It is possible to calculate the connection ratio, hand ratio, and base in the set value, and in addition to or instead of the connection ratio, hand ratio, and base for each set value, use the connection ratio, hand ratio, and base in these two or more set values. The information may be displayed on the display monitor 29. In this manner, by enabling the display ratio 29, the combination ratio, and the base at two or more set values to be displayed on the display monitor 29, it is possible to grasp the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in more detail. Note that the combined information is not limited to the form in which the combined ratio, combination ratio, and base are calculated for two or more set values and can be displayed on the display monitor 29. , The average value of the combination ratio and the base may be calculated and displayed on the display monitor 29.

  The display monitor 29 may be configured to be able to display only the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in accordance with the set values. Further, on the display monitor 29, the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base according to the set value are displayed as the initial display. The display may be switched to the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. The display monitor 29 may be able to display numerical values other than the base ratio, the winning combination, and the base, such as the number of prize balls per predetermined time (for example, one hour), as the predetermined information corresponding to the set value.

  For example, under specific conditions, such as immediately after the end of a jackpot game or during a reduced working time, by using a special fluctuation pattern determination table different from the normal fluctuation pattern determination table, a fluctuation display with a specific fluctuation pattern than during normal times ( For example, a shortened non-reach variation pattern (PA1-4) may be easily executed. When the variation pattern can be determined using the special variation pattern determination table, the determination of the variation pattern using the special variation pattern determination table is terminated and switched to the normal determination according to the set value. The timing may be different. Specifically, when the set value is 1, the variation pattern is determined using the special variation pattern determination table until the fifteenth variation display after the big hit game ends, and the variation pattern is determined after the big hit game ends. After the first time, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the normal fluctuation pattern determination table, and if the set value is 2, the special fluctuation pattern determination table is displayed until the tenth fluctuation display after the end of the big hit game. Is used to determine the fluctuation pattern. After the end of the big hit game, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the normal fluctuation pattern determination table. If the set value is 3, the big hit game is determined. The fluctuation pattern is determined using the special fluctuation pattern determination table up to the fifth fluctuation display after the end, and the fluctuation pattern at the normal time after the end of the big hit game is determined. It may be determined variation pattern using the determination table.

  After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed in step Sa9 in the main process or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a special variation pattern is used in the first tenth variation. When the variable display is executed, it indicates that a set value (for example, set value 1) advantageous to the player is set, and after the initialization (clear) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the pachinko game machine After the setting value set to 1 is changed, if the fluctuation display is executed in a special fluctuation pattern at the 30th fluctuation, a setting value (for example, setting value 1) advantageous to the player is set. Is a game feature that focuses on whether or not the variable display is executed in a special fluctuation pattern at a specific timing or a specific number of times, such as when It may be. In the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 has such a game characteristic, when the set value is 1, initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed or the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. After the set value is changed, the rate of execution of the change in the special change pattern is the highest at the first tenth change, and when the set value is 3, initialization of the RAM 102 ( After the (Clear) is executed, or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, the rate at which the variation is executed in the special variation pattern at the first tenth variation becomes the lowest. Only when the set value is 1, the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed. After, it is sufficient to change at a special variation pattern in the first 30 variation eyes is executed.

  The switching condition (the number of fluctuations before switching the table) for switching the fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern from the special fluctuation pattern determination table to the normal fluctuation pattern determination table differs depending on the set value. The ratio may be determined. Due to different switching conditions for switching the fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern according to the set value, the determination ratio of a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, shortened non-reach (PA1-4)) decreases. Since the player can be made to pay attention to the timing, the effect of the variation pattern can be enhanced.

  After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a predetermined time (for example, one hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( Until the fluctuation display (for example, 100 times) is executed, the determination ratio of the fluctuation display of the specific fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation display of the super-reach fluctuation pattern) is determined by using each fluctuation pattern determination table in a normal state. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be increased or decreased as compared with the case where the variation pattern is determined. In this case, the execution of the variation display of the variation pattern of the super reach is determined at different determination ratios depending on whether the set value is 1, 2, or 3. Good. As a result, a predetermined time (for example, one hour) elapses after initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is performed, or a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, or Until the predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of the fluctuation display is executed, the player can be made to pay attention to the number of times of the fluctuation display of the super-reach fluctuation pattern. Can be increased. Further, after the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is performed, or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, until a predetermined time elapses, or a predetermined number of times of fluctuation display is performed. Is provided for each set value, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided to the player by executing the change display according to the change pattern corresponding to these set values. The notification may be made possible.

  After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a predetermined time (for example, one hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( Until the fluctuation display (for example, 100 times) is executed, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern other than the super reach such as the non-reach and the normal reach differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, a variation pattern different from a normal variation pattern such as a non-reach, a normal reach, a super reach, or the like (for example, an extremely short variation time of 0.1 or the like) depending on a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 The determination ratio of a fluctuation pattern or a fluctuation pattern whose fluctuation time is extremely long such as 10 minutes may be different.

  After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a predetermined time (for example, one hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( For example, during a specific period until the variable display of (100 times) is executed, a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested at a rate at which a specific effect is executed. For example, it is possible to execute a high setting suggestion effect indicating that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is an advantageous setting value for the player, and the setting set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 for a specific period. When the value is 1 (the setting value most advantageous to the player), the high setting value suggestion effect is most easily executed, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3 (the setting value most disadvantageous to the player). ), It is only necessary to make the high setting value suggestion effect most difficult to execute. In the specific period, at least one of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach, depending on whether the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed since the last time power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 was stopped. The determination ratio of the variation pattern may be different.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured as a pachinko gaming machine capable of controlling the gaming state to a positively changing state after the end of the big hit game, and the game after the big hit game is terminated based on the passing of the game ball through the third count switch during the big hit game. The state may be controllable to a probable state. In this case, as the jackpot type, a jackpot type that opens the second big winning opening during the jackpot game, that is, a jackpot type (hereinafter, jackpot X) that allows the game ball to pass through the third count switch during the jackpot game, A jackpot type (hereinafter, jackpot Y) that does not open the second jackpot during the jackpot game, that is, a game ball that cannot pass through the third count switch during the jackpot game is provided, and the determination rate of the jackpot X and the jackpot Y May be changed according to the set value. By doing so, the rate at which the gaming state is controlled to be in the positive change state after the end of the big hit game can be varied according to the set value, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition to, or instead of, the rate at which the fluctuation display result becomes a jackpot or the rate of determining the jackpot type, the number of prize balls when a game ball wins each winning opening, or the large number in each round during a jackpot game The upper limit winning number of game balls to the winning opening may be made different depending on the set value. Further, the opening pattern of the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening during the big hit game may be made different depending on the set value. Thereby, the number of prize balls awarded in the big hit gaming state can be made different according to the set value, so that the gaming interest can be improved.

  A movable body may be provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a movable body effect of operating the movable body during a game such as a variable display or a big hit game may be executable. When such a movable body is provided, it is possible to execute variable winning initialization control such as confirmation of advancing and retreating operation of the regulating member inside the second winning opening, and to confirm the operation of the movable body and move the movable body to the initial position. The movable body initialization control to be moved can be executed by the effect control CPU 120, and when a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, or when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, (When a new set value is set to 1), the variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be executed. Thus, the new set value can be accurately reflected on the operation of the regulating member and the movable body. The variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be executed after execution of step Sa13 or step Sa14 in the main processing. For example, the variable winning initialization control or the movable body initialization control may be executed at the timing when the first timer interrupt occurs. If the variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control can be executed, the variable winning initialization control may be started at a timing before the movable body initialization control. Alternatively, the variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be started simultaneously, and the variable winning initialization control may be ended before the movable body initialization control. As a result, the initialization control relating to the winning of the game ball can be appropriately performed.

  The determination ratio of the super reach variation pattern may differ depending on the set value. The specific variable display pattern may be a variation pattern different from the variation pattern of the super reach. The setting of which variation pattern is the specific variable display pattern can be arbitrarily changed according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIGS. 9-23 and 9-24 show a modification in which the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are installed at the sides of the main board 11. By providing the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated unless a game machine staff or the like opens the game machine frame 3. is there. In addition, by providing a security cover 500A that covers the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the pachinko machine when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed is provided. The illegal change of the set value of the gaming machine 1 may be prevented.

  The security cover 500A is attached to the lower part on the right side of the outer frame 1a. Accordingly, when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security switch 500A approaches the lock switch 51 and the setting switch 52 from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the lock switch 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated. It can be. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the security switch 500A is separated from the lock switch 51 and the setting switch 52, so that the lock switch 51 and the setting switch 52 can be operated. The lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are covered with a cover body from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the cover body is further covered with the security cover 500A from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. By covering from the back side of the gaming machine 1 (the cover body is pressed forward by the security cover 500A), the illegal change of the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed is stronger. May be prevented. When the setting switch 52 is replaced with the clear switch AK001, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with a cover or a security cover 500A instead of the setting switch 52.

  FIG. 9-25 shows a modification in which a security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the security cover 500B may be provided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction with respect to the gaming machine frame 3. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the right end of the security cover 500B is sandwiched between the right side of the outer frame 1a and the gaming machine frame 3, and the security cover 500B is connected to the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 on the back. What is necessary is just to make it immovable from the state covered from the side. Then, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be made operable by sliding the security cover 500B. When the setting switch 52 is replaced with the clear switch AK001, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with the security cover 500B instead of the setting switch 52.

  FIG. 9-26 shows a modification in which the security cover is provided rotatably. Specifically, the left end of the security cover 500C may be pivotally supported so as to be rotatable with respect to a vertically oriented pivot provided on the back side of the gaming machine frame 3. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the right end of the security cover 500C is sandwiched between the right side of the outer frame 1a and the gaming machine frame 3, and the security cover 500C is set to the lock switch 51. What is necessary is just to make it impossible to move from the state where the changeover switch 52 is covered from the back side. When the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be operated by rotating the security cover 500C around a pivot (not shown). When the setting switch 52 is replaced with the clear switch AK001, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with the security cover 500C instead of the setting switch 52.

  When these security covers are provided so as to overlap with the main substrate 11, the security covers are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the mounting surface of the main substrate 11 and the visibility of the sealing seal are not hindered. Is also good.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 may have different gaming properties, such as a probable variable loop type and a V probable type. In the case of the probability variation loop type or the V probability variation type, a function (so-called small hit time) capable of increasing the number of possessed balls by a small hit for opening the first big winning opening after a specific big hit game ends. You may have it. In the case of a gaming machine having the function of the small hit time, the big hit probability is made different according to the set value (for example, in the case of the set value 1, the big hit probability of the normal state is set to 1/200 and the big hit probability of the stable change state is set. Is set to 1/20, and in the case of the set value 2, the jackpot probability of the normal state is set to 1/300 and the jackpot probability of the probable change state is set to 1/30. Since the initial hit probability is higher than when the other set values are set, it is easier to enter the small hit time, but the probability of the big hit during the probability change control is higher than when the other set values are set. , The small hit time is likely to end. In other words, when a small hit time function is installed in a pachinko gaming machine capable of executing the probability change control, the smaller the set value of the big hit probability in the normal state, the higher the probability of entering the small hit time, while The hit time is less likely to continue, and the smaller the set value with the lower probability of a big hit in the normal state, the lower the probability of entering the small hit time, but the easier the small hit time. For this reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the probability variable loop type or the V probability variation type, not only can the width of the game be expanded by installing the function of the small hit time, but also a set value with a low big hit probability is set. Even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used, it is possible to cause the player to have an intention to play a game.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the V-variable type, the opening pattern of the large winning port for determining the variable control in the round for determining the variable control is changed to the long-term opening pattern (the open pattern in which the gaming ball can easily enter the large winning port for determining the variable control). ) And the short-term opening pattern (the opening pattern in which the game ball is difficult to win the large winning opening for the probability change control), the long-term opening pattern and the short-term opening pattern are determined according to the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this case, the actual probability of intrusion (the probability of a large probability of change) may be made different by determining at different rates.

  A jackpot type determination gate is provided at a predetermined position in the game area (for example, a position above the second big winning opening), and the game ball passes through the jackpot type determination gate after the special symbol is derived and displayed in a combination indicating the jackpot. At this time, the random number value MR2 for the jackpot type determination may be extracted, and the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type determined based on the extracted value of MR2 may be started. When the jackpot type determining gate is provided in this manner, the jackpot type is determined at a different rate according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, 16 round jackpot and 4 round jackpot are provided as jackpot types). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the ratio controlled in the jackpot gaming state of the 16 round big hit is the highest, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is 3, the ratio controlled to the jackpot game state of the 16 round jackpot is the lowest).

  The lock switch 51, the setting changeover switch 52, or the clear switch AK001 may be provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 3. When the lock switch 51, the setting changeover switch 52, or the clear switch AK001 is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 3 as described above, the lock switch 51, the setting changeover switch 52, or the clear switch AK001 is provided for the hitting operation handle or the hitting launching device. Providing it in the vicinity makes it impossible to operate unless the glass door frame 3a is opened.

  What is determined at a different rate in accordance with the set value may be at least as long as it is determined whether or not to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, such as at least a jackpot gaming state, The variation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Depending on the set value, determine whether the fluctuation display result is "big hit" or "small hit" at a different rate, but at the same rate regardless of the set value, big hit type In determining the change pattern or the change pattern, the change ratio of the change pattern is not changed even if the set value is changed. Therefore, the set value is not suggested to the player or the like, or it is difficult to suggest the set value. When determining not only the fluctuation display result but also the fluctuation pattern at a different ratio according to the set value that is set, the change ratio of the fluctuation pattern is changed when the setting value is changed, so that the player etc. A set value can be suggested or is easily suggested.

  As described above, in the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, the CPU 103 executes the main processing in accordance with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, and the operation by the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 is performed. According to the detection result, it is possible to control to any of the setting change state, the setting confirmation state, the initialization state, and the power failure recovery state. The setting change state is a change permission state in which the setting change switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 is operated to change the set value. The setting check state is a state in which the set value set on the display monitor 29 can be checked. The initialization state is a state in which the storage contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared), unlike the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. The power failure recovery state is a state in which the contents stored in the RAM 102 have been restored to the contents at the time of the power failure.

  FIG. 9-27 shows an example of state control according to switch detection at power-on. If the lock switch 51 is on and the clear switch AK001 is on when the power supply is started by turning on the power based on the operation of the power switch AK002, the setting change process is performed in step Sa13 of the main process. By being executed, the setting change state is controlled. In this case, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized in step Sa9 of the main processing. On the other hand, if the lock switch 51 is on and the clear switch AK001 is off when the power supply is started, the setting confirmation process is executed in step AKS002 of the main process, so that the setting is performed. Controls the confirmation state. In this case, step Sa9 of the main process is not executed, and the contents stored in the RAM 102 are restored to the contents at the time of the power failure by steps Sa41 and Sa42. If the lock switch 51 is off and the clear switch AK001 is on when the power supply is started, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized in step Sa9 of the main process, thereby setting the initialization state. Control. In this case, since the lock switch 51 is determined to be off in step Sa12 of the main process, the setting change process in step Sa13 is not executed. If the lock switch 51 is off and the clear switch AK001 is off when the power supply is started, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are restored to the contents at the time of the power failure by steps Sa41 and Sa42 of the main processing. In this way, the power outage recovery state is controlled. In this case, since the lock switch 51 is determined to be off in step AKS001 of the main processing, the setting confirmation processing in step AKS002 is not executed. As described above, in accordance with the power-on operation using the power switch AK002, the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 detect various operations such as on / off switching operation and depressing operation by game room attendants and the like. , The state can be controlled according to the detection results.

(Explanation of the means relating to the above-mentioned characteristic part)
The above embodiment includes the following features. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine capable of setting a set value, for example, there is a pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a dedicated set value display unit for displaying the set value set is provided to prevent an increase in the cost of the gaming machine. There was a problem that can not be. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion which solves this problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing of Sa13) which can be set to any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any one of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value,
A game in which a game value is given based on a game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a first winning opening, a second winning opening, etc.). Value providing means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a jackpot opening process);
Information display means (for example, display monitor 29, etc.) capable of displaying information on the game value provided by the game value provision means;
With
The information display means is capable of displaying the set value set by the setting means (for example, display by the first display unit 29A of the display monitor 29).
According to this means 1, it is not necessary to separately provide a display device for displaying the set value, so that an increase in the cost of the game machine is prevented. Can be.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 of the above-described feature,
The information display means can display predetermined information in accordance with a set value (for example, a portion on the display monitor 29 where a connection ratio, a combination ratio, and a base can be displayed).
The gaming machine described in Means 1 is described. In Means 2, the state of the gaming machine can be easily grasped.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 of the above feature,
The information display means can sequentially display predetermined information of each set value. (A part displayed sequentially at intervals of 5 seconds, etc.)
A gaming machine described in Means 2 is described. In Means 3, predetermined information of each set value can be easily grasped.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 of the above feature,
The information display means can display predetermined information of each set value in different display modes (for example, in the case of the set value 1, the connection ratio, the combination ratio and the base are displayed in red, and in the case of the set value 2, the connection ratio, (The part where the role ratio and the base are displayed in green and the setting value 3 is the part where the connection ratio, the role ratio and the base are displayed in blue)
A gaming machine described in the means 2 or 3 is described. In the means 4, it is possible to easily grasp predetermined information of each set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 of the above feature,
Operating means (for example, a display changeover switch 30);
The information display means can switch and display predetermined information of each set value in accordance with the operation of the operation means (for example, by operating the display changeover switch 30, the connection ratio of the set value 1, the combination ratio, the base The display is switched to the display of the connection ratio, the duty ratio and the base of the set value 2, and the display of the connection ratio, the duty ratio and the base of the set value 2 is changed to the display of the connection ratio, the duty ratio and the base of the set value 3. Switching part)
A gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to 4 is described. In this means 5, predetermined information of each set value can be easily grasped.

As a gaming machine of the means 6 of the above-mentioned feature,
The information display means displays predetermined information corresponding to the set value set by the setting means (for example, a portion which can display only the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base corresponding to the set value set) Such)
A gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to 5 is described, and in this means 6, a task of easily confirming predetermined information of a set value set by the setting means is easily performed. be able to.

As a gaming machine of the means 7 of the above-mentioned characteristic portion,
Calculation means capable of calculating information on the game value provided by the game value provision means (for example, the CPU 103 has a connection ratio (%), a combination ratio (%), a total connection ratio (%), a combination A part that calculates a base (base 1 (%)) calculated based on the ratio (%) and the previous 60000 prize balls, and a base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls. Etc.)
The calculating means can individually calculate the information for each set value (for example, a general winning prize ball, a first starting opening prize ball, a normal electric prize ball, a special electric prize ball, a total prize ball, The driving total is stored in a storage area (ring buffer) corresponding to the set value that has been set, and can be individually calculated for each set value.
The information display means displays only the information corresponding to any one of the set values (for example, a connection ratio corresponding to any one of the set values 1 to 3; Role ratio, part that can display only the base, etc.)
A gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6 described above is described. In this means 7, information can be easily checked.

As a gaming machine of the means 8 of the above-mentioned characteristic portion,
Calculation means capable of calculating information on the game value provided by the game value provision means (for example, the CPU 103 has a connection ratio (%), a combination ratio (%), a total connection ratio (%), a combination A part that calculates a base (base 1 (%)) calculated based on the ratio (%) and the previous 60000 prize balls, and a base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls. Etc.)
The calculation means can individually calculate the individual information that is the information corresponding to each set value, and can calculate the composite information that is the information according to two or more different set values (for example, The sum of the ratios, winning combinations, bases, etc., calculated for two or more set values),
The information display means is capable of displaying the information and the composite information (for example, a part that calculates the ratio, the winning ratio, and the base at two or more set values and makes the display possible on the display monitor 29).
A gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7 is described. According to this means 8, the state of the gaming machine can be grasped in more detail.

(Explanation of production control for other features)
FIG. 9-28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the embodiment including the above-described characteristic unit. This effect control main process may be executed in place of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes an initialization process (step AKS011) similar to that of the above-described embodiment, and then, unlike the above-described embodiment, executes a power-on command process (step AKS011). AKS012) is executed. After executing the power-on command processing, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step AKS013), and if it is off (step AKS013; No), as in the above embodiment, The process of step AKS013 is repeatedly executed and the process stands by. On the other hand, when the timer interrupt flag is on (step AKS013; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step AKS014), the command analysis process (step AKS015), and the effect control process process (Step AKS016) and effect random number update processing (Step AKS017) are sequentially executed.

  FIG. 9-29 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in step AKS012 as power-on command processing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 acquires the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 as the received command when the power supply is started, and determines the content thereof. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the received command is a command 9000H serving as a RAM clear notification command (step AKS021). If the received command is not the RAM clear notification command (step AKS021; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a command 9200H that is a power failure recovery designation command (step AKS022). If it is not a power failure recovery stop command (step AKS022; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a command 9100H serving as a setting change start command (step AKS023). If it is not a setting change start command (step AKS023; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a command 9400H serving as a setting confirmation start command (step AKS024). If the command is not a setting confirmation start command (step AKS024; No), the process returns to step AKS021, and repeats steps AKS021 to AKS024 until a reception command is acquired, and waits. When a predetermined error determination time elapses without obtaining the reception command, it may be notified that an error of the reception command has occurred.

  If it is determined in step AKS023 that the received command is a setting change start command (step AKS023; Yes), a game stop state start process is executed (step AKS025). In the game stop state start process, the progress of the effect control accompanying the progress of the game is stopped in response to the game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state start process executed in step AKS025, for example, among the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for the commands other than the setting change end command, the setting for invalidating the reception is performed. do it. In this way, for example, it is only necessary to regulate so that various effects associated with the progress of the game, such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during a big hit, are not executed. When the setting change start command is received, when the game is in the game stop state corresponding to the setting change state, various effects associated with the progress of the game that can be executed when the game is not in the game stop state are not executed. Is set as the range or limit.

  After executing the game stop state start time process in step AKS025, control to start setting change notification is performed (step AKS026). For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display a setting change notification screen based on control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting change notification, and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output a setting change notification sound. Then, the control may be performed. After the control of the setting change notification is started, it is determined whether or not the setting change is to be ended (step AKS027). In step AKS027, when the command received from main board 11 is command 93XXH serving as a setting change end command, it may be determined that the setting change is to be ended. When the setting change end command is not received and the setting change is not ended (step AKS027; No), step AKS027 is repeatedly executed and the process stands by.

  If it is determined in step AKS027 that the setting change is to be ended (step AKS027; Yes), control is performed to end the setting change notification (step AKS028). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control so as to end the display of the setting change notification screen on the effect display device 5 and end the output of the setting change notification sound by the speakers 8L and 8R. After the control of the setting change notification ends, a game stop state end processing is executed (step AKS029). In the processing at the time of ending the game stop state, a setting may be made so that command reception from the main board 11 which has been invalidated is made valid. Thus, the regulation may be released so that various effects associated with the progress of the game, such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during a big hit, can be executed.

  Thereafter, control for executing the initialization notification is performed (step AKS030). For example, the effect control CPU 120 initializes the effect display device 5 based on the control data prepared in advance corresponding to the initialization notification during an initialization notification period until a predetermined initialization notification time elapses. Control may be performed so that the notification screen is displayed and the initialization notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Even when it is determined in step AKS021 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command (step AKS021; Yes), the process may proceed to step AKS030 to execute the initialization notification. In this way, it is possible to notify that the storage contents of the RAM 102 have been initialized (cleared) in response to the detection of the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 in response to the start of power supply by turning on the power.

  When it is determined in step AKS024 that the received command is a setting confirmation start command (step AKS024; Yes), a game stop state start process is executed (step AKS031). In the game stop state start process executed in step AKS031, for example, among the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for the commands other than the setting confirmation end command, the setting for invalidating the reception is performed. do it. In this way, for example, it is only necessary to regulate so that various effects associated with the progress of the game, such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during a big hit, are not executed. When the setting confirmation start command is received, when the game is in the game stop state corresponding to the setting confirmation state, various effects accompanying the progress of the game that can be executed when the game is not in the game stop state are not executed. Is set as a range or limit.

  After executing the game stop state start time process in step AKS031, control for starting the setting confirmation notification is performed (step AKS032). For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display a setting confirmation notification screen based on control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting confirmation notification, and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output a setting confirmation notification sound. Then, the control may be performed. After the control of the setting confirmation notification is started in this way, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation is to be ended (step AKS033). In step AKS033, when the command received from the main board 11 is the command 9401H serving as the setting confirmation end command, it may be determined that the setting confirmation ends. If the setting confirmation end command has not been received and the setting confirmation has not been completed (step AKS033; No), step AKS033 is repeatedly executed to wait.

  When it is determined in step AKS033 that the setting confirmation is to be ended (step AKS033; Yes), control is performed to end the setting confirmation notification (step AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control so as to end the display of the setting confirmation notification screen on the effect display device 5 and terminate the output of the setting confirmation notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this way, after the control of the setting confirmation notification is completed, the game stop state end processing is executed (step AKS035). Thus, the regulation may be released so that various effects associated with the progress of the game, such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during a big hit, can be executed.

  Thereafter, control for executing the power failure restoration notification may be performed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display a power failure recovery notification screen based on control data prepared in advance corresponding to the power failure recovery notification, and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output a power failure recovery notification sound. Then, control may be performed. Even when it is determined in step AKS022 that the received command is the power failure restoration designation command (step AKS022; Yes), the power failure restoration notification may be executed. In these cases, if it is possible to notify that the content stored in the RAM 102 has been restored to the content at the time of the power failure in response to the case where the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is not detected with the start of power supply by turning on the power, Good.

  FIG. 9-30 shows control priorities with respect to notification and screen display by effect control in the present embodiment. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state with the start of power supply upon power-on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 executes the game stop state start processing in steps AKS025 and AKS031 of the power-on command processing. After the game stop state start process is executed, the reception of a command different from the setting change end command or the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and regulation is exercised so that control relating to normal effects is not executed. Therefore, the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification is the highest priority among the priorities related to the effect control. For example, the priority AKP02 of the power saving function setting screen or the like is lower than the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. The power saving function setting screen is displayed when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (game machine frame 3) is set to a predetermined position as a specific position. This is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device 5 in order to enable the presence / absence, type, and setting of the current date and time by RTC. Since the priority AKP03 for the magnet error notification and the like is lower than the priority AKP02 for the power saving function setting screen and the like, the priority AKP03 is lower than the priority AKP01 for the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. Since the priority AKP0Z of the normal game screen corresponding to the progress of the game at the normal time is the lowest priority among the priorities related to the effect control, the priority AKP01 is lower than the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. Degree.

  As described above, the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification is higher than the priority AKP02 of the power saving function setting screen or the like. When the setting is changed or the control for starting the setting confirmation notification is performed in step AKS032, the switch position of the output amount changeover switch is temporarily switched to the specific position before the setting change or the setting confirmation is completed. Even if the output amount changeover switch is switched, display of the power saving function setting screen is not started. In this way, the display related to the set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the setting change notification screen and the setting confirmation notification screen is displayed in preference to the display related to the output amount of the effect or the output control such as the power saving function setting screen. Thereby, the display relating to the set value is appropriately performed, so that it is possible to prevent the trouble in the work of changing the set value.

(Explanation of Modifications Related to Effect Control in Other Features)
FIG. 9-31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an effect control main process executed in a modification in which a setting confirmation process can be executed during a game. The set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to a form that can be checked when the power is turned on, and the check of the set value may be executable during the game. In this case, after the CPU 103 starts the process after step Sa16 in the main process, the game machine frame 3 is opened by a game room attendant or the like, and a switching operation of turning on the lock switch 51 is performed. When the operation is detected, the display monitor 29 causes the first display unit 29A to display the current set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. This display is not changed even if the setting changeover switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 is pressed down by a game room attendant or the like, and serves as a display for confirming the current set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. I have. When the execution of the setting confirmation process is started during the game, a setting confirmation state is set in which the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is issued from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Is transmitted. When the execution of the setting confirmation processing ends, the setting confirmation state ends, and a command 9401H serving as a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the effect control main process in the modified example, after performing the effect random number updating process in step AKS017, the in-progress setting confirmation process (step AKS01A) is performed, and then the process returns to step AKS013.

  FIG. 9-32 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the processing executed in step AKS01A as the ongoing setting confirmation processing. For example, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting check is being displayed on the display monitor 29 so that the set value can be checked (step AKS051). In step AKS051, for example, after the control in step AKS058 is performed, it may be determined that the setting is being confirmed during the period until the control in step AKS060 is performed. If the setting is not being confirmed (step AKS051; No), it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation start command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step AKS052). At this time, when the setting confirmation start command is received (step AKS052; Yes), it is determined whether or not the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in progress (step AKS053). In step AKS053, after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted from the main board 11, it is determined that the game is not in progress in a period until the first variation start command or the second variation start command is received, In other periods, it may be determined that the game is in progress.

  When it is determined in step AKS053 that the game is in progress (step AKS053; Yes), the in-progress setting confirmation flag is set to an on state (step AKS054). The in-progress setting confirmation flag is a flag indicating that a setting confirmation start command has been received during the progress of the game. If it is determined in step AKS052 that the setting confirmation start command has not been received (step AKS052; No), or if the in-progress setting confirmation flag is turned on in step AKS054, the waiting for the customer transmitted from the main board 11 is performed. It is determined whether or not a demonstration designation command has been received (step AKS055). At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not been received (step AKS055; No), the ongoing setting confirmation processing ends.

  When it is determined in step AKS055 that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been received (step AKS055; Yes), it is determined whether or not the ongoing setting confirmation flag is ON (step AKS056). At this time, if the ongoing setting confirmation flag is OFF (step AKS056; No), the ongoing setting confirmation processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the in-progress setting confirmation flag is on (step AKS056; Yes), the in-progress setting confirmation flag is cleared and turned off (step AKS057), and control for starting the setting confirmation notification is performed. (Step AKS058). Even when it is determined in step AKS053 that the game is not in progress (step AKS053; No), the process proceeds to step AKS058 to perform control to start setting confirmation notification. Thus, when the setting confirmation start command is received during the progress of the game, the setting confirmation notification can be started after the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received.

  If it is determined in step AKS051 that the setting check is being performed (step AKS051; Yes), it is determined whether a setting check end command has been received (step AKS059). At this time, if the setting confirmation end command has not been received (step AKS059; No), the ongoing setting confirmation processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting confirmation end command has been received (step AKS059; Yes), control for ending the setting confirmation notification is performed (step AKS060).

  By performing such a setting confirmation process in progress, when the setting value set by executing the setting confirmation process during the game is displayed on the display monitor 29, on the side of the effect control board 12, After receiving the customer waiting demo display command transmitted from the main board 11, the display of the setting confirmation notification screen and the output of the setting confirmation notification voice can be started. Thereby, when the set value can be confirmed during execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game, it is possible to prevent the in-progress effect from being stopped, thereby preventing inconvenience due to the confirmation of the set value.

  In the case where the main board 11 performs the setting confirmation processing during the game, the setting confirmation state may be controlled after the customer waiting demonstration designation command can be transmitted. In this case, for example, a setting confirmation start command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 together with the customer waiting demonstration designation command. Alternatively, instead of transmitting the setting confirmation start command together with the customer waiting demonstration designation command, a dedicated command corresponding to the setting confirmation during the game is transmitted, and after the progress of the game is completed, the set value which is set May be controlled in such a state as to be able to be checked.

  Alternatively, the set values that are set are displayed on the display monitor 29 provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and there is no need for the effect display device 5 to perform display corresponding to the set values. Therefore, when performing the setting confirmation process during the game, the display monitor 29 does not transmit a setting confirmation start command or the like from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, and the display that can confirm the setting value is displayed. Control for starting may be performed. In this case, on the effect control board 12, control by the effect control CPU 120 or the like may be performed so that the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game is continued.

  In addition to the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification, the setting change completion notification and the setting confirmation completion notification may be made executable. For example, in the power-on command processing, the control change in step AKS028 ends the setting change notification, starts the setting change end notification with the start of the setting change end notification period, and ends with the end of the setting change end notification period. The setting change end notification may be ended. In the power-on command processing, the setting confirmation notification is terminated by the control in step AKS034, the setting confirmation termination notification is started with the start of the setting confirmation termination notification period, and the setting confirmation termination notification period is terminated. The setting confirmation end notification may be ended.

  In the setting change notification, control may be performed such that the setting change notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R without displaying the setting change notification screen on the effect display device 5. In the setting confirmation notification, control may be performed so that the setting confirmation notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R without displaying the setting confirmation notification screen on the effect display device 5. Alternatively, in the setting change notification, in addition to the display of the setting change notification screen and the output of the setting change notification sound, or instead of part or all, the light emitting members of some or all of the game effect lamps 9 or the game effect lamps 9 Control may be performed such that an arbitrary light-emitting member such as a notification lamp provided separately from the light-emitting member emits light in a predetermined setting change notification mode. In the setting confirmation notification, in addition to the display of the setting confirmation notification screen and the output of the setting confirmation notification sound, or in place of part or all, instead of part or all of the game effect lamp 9, part of the game effect lamp 9 Alternatively, control may be performed such that all light-emitting members or an arbitrary light-emitting member such as a notification lamp provided separately from the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a predetermined setting confirmation notification mode. As described above, the setting change notification only needs to be able to notify that the setting value can be changed using an arbitrary effect device or an effect device different from the effect device. The setting confirmation notification only needs to be able to notify that the setting value can be confirmed using an arbitrary rendering device or a reporting device different from the rendering device. Note that the present invention is not limited to the mode in which the setting change notification or the setting confirmation notification is performed, and may be one in which one or both of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification are not performed.

  The command 93XXH serving as the setting change end command and the command 9401H serving as the setting confirmation end command are not limited to the form prepared, and a common setting end command is used as the setting change end command and the setting check end command. May be used. In this case, in the power-on command processing, in step AKS027, it is determined that the setting change is completed when the setting end command is received, and in step AKS033, the setting confirmation is ended when the setting end command is received. Then, it may be determined.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 71AK)
FIG. 9-33 shows a configuration example of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 regarding the characteristic portion 71AK of this embodiment. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may be provided on the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the upper right portion of the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is operable from the outside via an opening formed in a board case accommodating the effect control board 12. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may be a rotary switch capable of detecting a predetermined operation such as a switch changeover operation for initializing a predetermined effect output or the like. The effect output initially set by the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 only needs to include at least the volume of the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, the light emission amount of the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may be included. For example, when a game room staff opens the gaming machine frame 3, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 becomes operable. As described above, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is a condition that the initial setting of the effect output can be changed when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 initially sets the effect output to one of a plurality of stages. Further, depending on the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, it is switched using the stick controller 31A or the like whether to permit or prohibit the effect output change adjustment by the player. The effect control CPU 120 may store data indicating such effect output settings in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 as output setting information.

  As shown in FIG. 9-33 (B), the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 has a total of 16 channels from “0” to “F”, and the knob 71AK002 is turned by the operation of turning the knob 71AK002. The corresponding switch position can be switched. In the present embodiment, the sound volume is initially set to one of six levels according to whether the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is “0” to “F”, and the sound volume is adjusted by the player. Whether to permit is switched. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is connected to the effect control CPU 120 directly or via a predetermined circuit, and a changeover switch signal indicating the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is input to the effect control CPU 120 to correspond to the channel. The switch position can be specified.

  FIG. 9-34 shows the initial setting control 71AKC01 such as effect output according to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. In the initial setting control 71AKC01, for example, when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is “5”, the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is determined according to “volume 6 (maximum)”. The upper limit sound volume is initially set to “97.0”, and the sound volume is set (adjusted) by the player to be controlled (permitted). The volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is not limited, and the output amount of an arbitrary effect device such as the light amount of the game effect lamp 9 may be initially set according to the switch position of the output amount switch 71AK001. . When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is any one of “6” to “F”, the volume setting (adjustment) by the player becomes impossible (prohibited), and the effect is produced by the initially set effect output. Is executed. Further, in response to the case where the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is “F”, a setting screen such as a power saving function can be displayed on the effect display device 5, and the presence or absence and type of the power saving function (power saving mode), and The value indicating the current date and time can be set (changed) by the RTC 126.

  As described above, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is provided on the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted. In addition, it is possible to control the output amount of the effect to one of a plurality of stages. In the effect control CPU 120, processing for controlling the output amount of the effect to any one of a plurality of stages is executed based on a switch signal capable of specifying the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001.

  FIG. 9-35 shows an example of execution of the setting change notification, the setting confirmation notification, and the initialization notification with respect to the characteristic unit 71AK. In this execution example, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (A), the setting change notification screen 71AKD01 is displayed on the effect display device 5 as the setting change notification, and the setting change notification sound 71AKE01 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. . As the setting confirmation notification, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (B), the setting confirmation notification screen 71AKD02 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and the setting confirmation notification sound 71AKE02 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As the initialization notification, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (C), an initialization notification screen 71AKD03 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and an initialization notification sound 71AKE03 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In the characteristic unit 71AK, similarly to the above embodiment, the power-on command processing is executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main processing. In the power-on command processing, the setting change notification is started by the control in step AKS026, and the setting change notification is ended by the control in step AKS028. Further, the setting confirmation notification is started by the control in step AKS032, and the setting confirmation notification is ended by the control in step AKS034. Further, by the control in step AKS030, the initialization notification starts at the start of the initialization notification period, and ends at the end of the initialization notification period. Note that the setting change notification screen 71AKD01, the setting confirmation notification screen 71AKD02, and the initialization notification screen 71AKD03 are not limited to being displayed on the entire display area of the effect display device 5, but may be part of the display area of the effect display device 5. May be displayed.

  The characteristic portion 71AK is provided with an output amount changeover switch 71AK001, and can perform an initial setting such that the effect output such as volume is one of a plurality of stages corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. On the other hand, the audio output in the setting change notification, the setting confirmation notification, and the initialization notification is at the maximum volume that can be output in the pachinko gaming machine 1 irrespective of the initial setting of the volume corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. What is necessary is just to output at a certain "volume 6 (maximum)" (upper limit volume "97.0"). For example, in the setting change notification, the setting change notification sound 71AKE01 for notifying a message “Setting is being changed” is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume. In the setting confirmation notification, a setting confirmation notification sound 71AKE02 that notifies a message “Setting is being confirmed” is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume. In the initialization notification, the initialization notification sound 71AKE03 for notifying a message of "initialized" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume.

  As described above, in response to the operation of switching the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, the operation related to the adjustment of the effect output is detected, and based on the detection, the output amount of the effect is controlled to one of a plurality of stages. In the setting change notification serving as the notification regarding the change of the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the output of the setting change notification sound 71AKE01 is performed based on the maximum volume that is the common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation related to the effect output adjustment. . In the setting confirmation notification and the initialization notification, as the output of the setting confirmation notification sound 71AKE02 and the initialization notification sound 71AKE03, the notification may be performed based on the maximum volume which is a common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation related to the effect output adjustment. As described above, since the notification is performed based on the common output amount, it is possible to prevent the illegal act from being performed in accordance with the change or confirmation of the set value and the initialization (clearing) of the stored contents in the RAM 102.

  FIG. 9-36 shows a display example when the player volume adjustment, the power saving function setting, and the like are performed for the characteristic portion 71AK. For example, when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is "0" and the effect output has not been adjusted by the player yet, the volume setting is "volume 1 (minimum)". FIG. 9-36 (A) shows a player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 displayed on the effect display device 5 corresponding to this case. The player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 includes effect images indicating six memories corresponding to six levels of volume, and changes the display color of each memory according to the current volume. For example, when the volume setting is “volume 1 (minimum)”, one memory is displayed in a first display color (for example, red), and the remaining five memories are displayed in a second display color (for example, white). . At this time, in response to the operation of tilting the operation stick (lever) of the stick controller 31A to the right being detected, the volume setting is changed to “volume 2”, and the first volume is set on the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11. The display color memory is increased by one. In this manner, each time the first operation of tilting the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A in the first direction (right direction, etc.) is detected, a plurality of effects are produced until the effect output setting reaches the maximum. What is necessary is just to change so that the output amount may be increased by one step. On the other hand, each time the second operation of tilting the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A in the second direction (left direction) is detected, the effect output amount in a plurality of stages is set until the effect output setting reaches a minimum. What is necessary is just to change it so that it may decrease by one step.

  When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is “F”, the power saving function and the value of the RTC 126 can be set. FIG. 9-36 (B) shows a power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 displayed on the effect display device 5 corresponding to this case. The power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 includes a display area for setting the power saving function and a display area for setting the value of the current date and time (current time) by the RTC 126. When the power-saving function setting screen 71AKD12 is displayed, the presence or absence and type of the power-saving function (power-saving mode) are determined in response to the operation of operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B detected by the staff at the game hall or the like. Then, the RTC 126 sets (changes) a value indicating the current date and time. The effect control CPU 120 executes processing for setting (changing) the power saving function and the like based on the display of the power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 and detection of the operation of changing each setting. For example, when "power saving mode A" is selected in the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12, the control for activating the power saving function is performed only during the customer waiting demonstration in which the demonstration screen is displayed. Whatever is performed is sufficient. In the case where “power saving mode B” is set to be selected on the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12, for example, the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is displayed not only during the customer waiting demonstration but also during the execution of the variable display. Any control that activates the power saving function, such as reducing the (light emission amount), may be used.

  FIG. 9-37 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 for the characteristic portion 71AK. This effect control main process may be executed in place of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of the characteristic unit 71AK, the effect control CPU 120 executes the initialization process (step 71AKS011) and the power-on command process (step 71AKS012), similarly to the above embodiment. The initialization processing of step 71AKS011 is processing corresponding to the initialization processing of step AKS011 in the above embodiment, and the power-on command processing of step 71AKS012 is processing corresponding to the power-on processing of step AKS012 in the above embodiment. Should be fine. After executing the power-on command processing of step 71AKS012, unlike the above-described embodiment, the start-time output switching processing (step AKS013) is executed. Thereafter, similarly to the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step 71AKS014). If it is off (step 71AKS014; No), the process of step 71AKS014 is repeatedly executed. Wait. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on (step 71AKS014; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step 71AKS015), the command analysis process (step 71AKS016), and the effect control process process (Step 71AKS017), and the effect random number updating process (Step 71AKS018) are sequentially executed. Further, in the effect control main process of the characteristic unit 71AK, the ongoing output change process (step 71AKS019) is executed, and then the process returns to step 71AKS014.

  FIG. 9-38 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step 71AKS013 as the output switching processing at the start. In the start-time output switching process, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the switch position based on the switch signal from the output amount switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS031). At this time, it is determined whether the specified switch position is “F” (Step 71AKS032). When the switch position is other than “F” (Step 71AKS032; No), control for switching the initial setting of the output amount is performed by adjusting the effect output according to the switch position (Step 71AKS033), and the output at the start is performed. The switching process ends. In step 71AKS033, for example, initial output setting data indicating a switch position corresponding to a channel can be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

  If it is determined in step 71AKS032 that the switch position is “F” (step 71AKS032; Yes), control is performed to start setting of the power saving function and the like (step 71AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control such that the effect display device 5 displays the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 based on control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting of the power saving function and the like. After the control for setting the power saving function and the like is started in this way, it is determined whether the setting is completed (step 71AKS035). In step 71AKS035, when the selection of the item indicating "end" is determined on the power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12, it may be determined that the setting is completed. If this setting is not completed (step 71AKS035; No), control corresponding to the setting of the power saving function or the like is performed (step 71AKS036), and the process returns to step 71AKS035. In step 71AKS036, the display on the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 can be changed according to the detection of the operation of tilting the operation stick (lever) of the stick controller 31A, the detection of the operation of pressing the push button 31B, and the like. Control may be performed as described above.

  When it is determined in step 71AKS035 that the setting has been completed (step 71AKS035; Yes), control for ending the setting of the power saving function and the like is performed (step 71AKS037), and the start-time output switching process ends. In step 71AKS037, for example, the production control CPU 120 stores power saving function data indicating the presence or absence of the power saving function and the type (power saving mode) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the like. Further, when the setting for changing the value of the RTC 126 is performed, data indicating the changed value is set in the RTC 126.

  FIG. 9-39 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step 71AKS019 as the ongoing output change processing. In the in-progress output change process, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a switching permission condition has been satisfied (step 71AKS051). The switching permission condition may be predetermined as a condition for permitting adjustment of the effect output using the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 during execution of the effect control accompanying the progress of the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the switching permission condition may be satisfied when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. If such a switching permission condition is satisfied (step 71AKS051; Yes), the switch position is detected based on the switch signal from the output amount switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS052). Based on this detection result, it is determined whether or not the switch position has been changed (step 71AKS053). For example, the effect control CPU 120 compares the switch position indicated in the initial output setting data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 with the switch position specified from the changeover switch signal, and when the comparison result does not match, It may be determined that the switch position has been changed.

  If it is determined in step 71AKS053 that the switch position has been changed (step 71AKS053; Yes), it is determined whether or not the changed switch position is “F” (step 71AKS054). At this time, if the switch position is other than “F” (Step 71AKS054; No), control for switching the initial setting of the output amount is performed by adjusting the effect output according to the switch position (Step 71AKS055). In step 71AKS055, for example, initial output setting data indicating a switch position corresponding to a channel can be stored (updated) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

  If it is determined in step 71AKS054 that the switch position is "F" (step 71AKS054; Yes), control to start setting of the power saving function and the like is performed (step 71AKS056). In this case, processing similar to steps 71AKS034 to 71AKS037 of the output switching processing at the start may be performed. That is, it is determined whether or not the setting has been completed (step 71AKS057). If the setting has not been completed (step 71AKS057; No), control corresponding to the setting of the power saving function or the like is performed (step 71AKS058), and step 71AKS057. Return to Thereafter, when the setting is completed (Step 71AKS057; Yes), control for ending the setting of the power saving function and the like is performed (Step 71AKS058).

  When the switching permission condition is not satisfied in step 71AKS051 (step 71AKS051; No), when the switch position is not changed in step 71AKS053 (step 71AKS053; No), control is performed in step 71AKS055 or step 71AKS059. After performing, it is determined whether or not the player can adjust the volume or the like based on the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS060). In step 71AKS060, when the current switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is any one of “0” to “5”, the volume setting (adjustment) by the player is possible (permitted). It may be determined that the adjustment by the player is possible. If the adjustment by the player is impossible (prohibited) (step 71AKS060; No), the ongoing output change process ends. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the method of determining whether or not the switching permission condition is satisfied in step 71AKS051, and the switch position may be detected in step 71AKS052 without performing the determination in step 71AKS051.

  If it is determined in step 71AKS060 that the adjustment by the player is possible (step 71AKS060; Yes), it is determined whether an operation for changing the output amount of the effect has been detected (step 71AKS061). In step 71AKS061, for example, when the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 is displayed, the operation of changing the effect output amount in a plurality of stages is detected based on the detection result of the operation of operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. What is necessary is just to determine whether there was. If such an operation is not detected (step 71AKS061; No), the ongoing output change process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that an operation has been detected (step 71AKS061; Yes), control is performed to adjust the output amount according to the detection result (step 71AKS062), and the ongoing output change process ends. In step 71AKS062, when an operation of pressing down the push button 31B is detected on the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11, update output setting data indicating the changed volume setting and the like is stored (updated) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. It should be done.

(Explanation of Modification Example Regarding Characteristic Part 71AK)
FIG. 9-40 shows the priority of control regarding notification by effect control, screen display, and the like in the modified example of the characteristic portion 71AK. The pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to change the setting with the start of power supply by turning on the power. On the other hand, when the setting is controlled to a state in which the power supply is started by turning on the power, the game may be controlled so as not to be in the game stop state. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the processing at the start of the game stop state in step AKS031 of the command processing at the time of power-on. The input of the changeover switch signal that can specify the switch position may be made valid. In this case, the priority 71AKP11 of the setting change notification is the highest priority among the priorities relating to the effect control, and is higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen or the like. On the other hand, the priority 71AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification is lower than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen or the like. Since the priority 71AKP1Z of the normal game screen corresponding to the progress of the game at the normal time is the lowest priority among the priorities relating to the effect control, the priority AKP11 of the setting change notification and the setting screen for the power saving function etc. The priority is lower than the priority 71AKP12 and the priority AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification.

  As described above, the priority 71AKP11 of the setting change notification is higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen or the like. Therefore, when the control to start the setting change notification is performed in step AKS026 of the power-on command processing, Before the end of the setting change, even if the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is switched to the specific position of “F” even if the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is detected. First, the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 is not started. On the other hand, the priority 71AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification is lower than the priority 71AKP12 of the setting screen for the power saving function or the like, so that the control for starting the setting confirmation notification in step AKS032 of the power-on command processing is performed. When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is switched to the specific position “F” before the end of the setting confirmation, the power saving is performed based on the detection of the operation of switching the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. The display of the function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 may be started. As described above, when the setting value is changed, the control for switching the initial setting of the effect output amount is not executed, while when the setting value is confirmed, the control for switching the initial setting of the effect output amount may be executed. . Thereby, in order to prevent a trouble in the work of changing the set value, the stage of the output amount of the effect can be appropriately controlled together with the confirmation of the set value.

  By executing the power-on command processing in step 71AKS012 and then executing the start-time output switching processing in step 71AKS013, the operation for changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 in the setting change state is performed. Regardless, the present invention is not limited to the mode in which the control of the output amount of the effect is not executed, and it is determined whether or not the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount switch 71AK001 is detected in the power-on command processing. When the operation is detected, information indicating the switch position can be specified is stored, and after the setting change state is completed, control of the output amount of the effect is performed based on the stored information. May be used. For example, in the power-on command processing of the above-described embodiment, if it is determined in step AKS027 that the setting change has not been completed, the switch position is specified based on the changeover switch signal from the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. At this time, information indicating the result of specifying the switch position is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Thereafter, in step 71AKS031 of the start-time output switching process, the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may be specified based on the information indicating the result of specifying the switch position. In this case as well, in the setting change state, it is possible to restrict the control of the output amount of the effect from being performed regardless of the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount switch 71AK001.

  Alternatively, in the case of the setting change state, it is determined whether or not the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is a specific switch position, such as whether or not the switch position is "F". Alternatively, the control for displaying the setting change notification screen 71AKD01 on the effect display device 5 may be given priority over the control for displaying the power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 on the effect display device 5. In this case, when the setting change notification is ended by the control in step AKS028 of the power-on command processing, the control for displaying the setting change notification screen 71AKD01 which has been given priority on the effect display device 5 is also ended. It is only necessary that the display device 5 can start displaying the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12.

  Unlike the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, a detection device capable of detecting an operation performed by the player in a predetermined manner is provided, and a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed based on the detection of the operation by the detection device. Is also good. For example, in addition to or instead of the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001, a setting value change switch capable of detecting an operation such as a switching operation or a pressing operation by the player is provided, and the operation of the player is detected by the setting value change switch. In the same manner as when the operation is detected by the clear switch AK001, the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed.

  As described above, in the effect control main process of the characteristic unit 71AK, the power-on command process is executed in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment in step 71AKS012, and the start-time output switching process is executed in step 71AKS013. In the power-on command processing, the game stop state start processing is executed in, for example, step AKS025 or step AKS031. After the game stop state start process is executed, the reception of a command different from the setting change end command or the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and regulation is exercised so that control relating to normal effects is not executed. In this case, the input of the changeover switch signal that can specify the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 becomes invalid, and the adjustment of the effect output according to the switch position and the display of the setting screen 71AKD12 such as the power saving function are not performed. The control based on the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is restricted (prohibited). In this way, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state in which the setting value change is permitted with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, regardless of the detection of the operation related to the adjustment of the output amount of the effect, The execution of the control for switching the initial setting of the output amount is restricted (prohibited). Thereby, the control for changing the set value is given priority over the control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of the effect, so that it is possible to prevent the setting value changing work from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

  The effect control CPU 120 controls the execution of the effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the progress of the game. The effect control CPU 120 is provided on the effect control board. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is provided on the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted, and receives an operation related to adjustment of the output amount of the effect by the knob 71AK002. This makes it possible to appropriately switch the initial setting of the output amount of the effect in order to prevent a trouble in the work of changing the set value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

  In the effect control main processing of the characteristic unit 71AK, after executing the power-on command processing in step 71AKS012, the start-time output switching processing is executed in step 71AKS013. In the output switching process at the start of step 71AKS013, control is performed at step 71AKS033 to switch the initial setting of effect output according to the switch position, or control is performed at steps 71AKS034-71AKS037 to set the power saving function and the like. In this way, when the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled with the start of the power supply, if the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is detected before the setting change state ends, After the setting change state ends, control is performed to the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount switch 71AK001. This makes it possible to appropriately switch the initial setting of the output amount of the effect in order to prevent a trouble in the work of changing the set value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

  When the setting change notification is performed by the display screen of the effect display device 5 or the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the setting change notification sound 71AKE01 is output regardless of the initial volume setting corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. Is output at the maximum volume that can be output by the pachinko gaming machine 1. As described above, the notification is performed using the common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, thereby preventing the trouble of the setting value changing operation. Can be prevented from being performed. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

(Explanation of the means relating to the characteristic portion 71AK)
Regarding the above-described feature portion 71AK, a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different degrees of advantage for a player is described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine capable of changing settings related to effects, there is a gaming machine described in, for example, JP-A-2015-29614. However, in the technology described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-29614, while changing a plurality of settings having different degrees of advantage, control when changing the setting of the effect is not considered. Was. For this reason, there is a possibility that the operation of changing to a plurality of set values having different degrees of advantage for the player may be affected. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 71AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing a trouble in an operation of changing a set value,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of performing a game and being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage for the player is different based on the set value;
Setting control means (for example, CPU 103 executing steps Sa6 and Sa12) capable of controlling a change permission state for permitting change of the set value by the setting means with the start of power supply;
Effect-adjustment detecting means (for example, an output-amount changeover switch 71AK001 or the like) capable of detecting an operation relating to the adjustment of the output amount of the effect;
Output amount control means for controlling the output amount of the effect to any one of a plurality of stages based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detecting means (for example, the output switching process at the start of step 71AKS013 or the output change process in progress of step 71AKS019). Effect control CPU 120 to be executed), and
Limiting means for limiting the execution of the control by the output amount control means regardless of the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detecting means when the change is permitted, (for example, step AKS012 is executed as the power-on command processing of step 71AKS012). Effect control CPU 120 or the like for executing processing).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to such a configuration, the execution of the control by the output amount control means is restricted when the change is permitted, so that it is possible to prevent a trouble in the work of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK,
Effect control means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling execution of effects in accordance with the progress of the game;
An effect control board provided with the effect control means (for example, effect control board 12 or the like),
The effect control board further includes a reception unit (for example, a knob 71AK002 of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 or the like) for receiving an operation detectable by the effect adjustment detection unit.
The gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 71AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value while appropriately controlling the output amount of the effect.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK,
The output amount control means, when an operation is detected by the effect adjustment detection means before the change permission state ends, after the change permission state ends, the operation by the effect adjustment detection means ends. Is controlled to the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of (for example, execution of the start-time output switching process in step 71AKS013),
The game machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 71AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value while appropriately controlling the stage of the output amount of the effect.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK,
Unlike an operation performed by a player during a game, an initialization detecting means (for example, a clear switch AK001 or the like) that can detect an operation related to initialization of a gaming machine is provided.
In the change permission state, the set value by the setting means can be changed according to the detection of the operation by the initialization detecting means (for example, when a clear switch AK001 is used instead of the setting changeover switch 52, etc.). ),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 3 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a trouble in the operation of changing the set value without separately providing a configuration for changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK,
A change notifying unit (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, etc.) for notifying a change of the set value by the setting unit;
The change notification means performs notification (for example, output of a setting change notification sound 71AKE01 or the like) with a common output amount regardless of detection of operation by the effect adjustment detection means.
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to means 4 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a change in the set value due to an improper act and to prevent a trouble in the work of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 6 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK,
A setting confirmation control unit (for example, a CPU 103 that executes a setting confirmation process in step AKS002) capable of controlling a setting confirmation state for confirming a setting value set by the setting unit;
The output amount control means includes:
When in the setting confirmation state, it is possible to control the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detecting means (for example, the setting confirmation notification higher than the priority 71AKP13. Priority 71AKP12 etc.),
In the change permission state, the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detecting means is not controlled (for example, the priority of the setting change notification higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the setting screen for the power saving function etc.) 71AKP11 etc.),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 5 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK.
In such a configuration, the stage of the output amount of the effect can be controlled together with the confirmation of the set value, but the stage of the output amount of the effect is not controlled when the set value is changed. Problems can be prevented from occurring.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 72AK)
FIG. 9-41 shows an execution example of the power-on operation by the movable member driven by the operation motors AK011 to AK014. The movable members driven by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 include a first movable member serving as a first movable effect device and a second movable member serving as a second movable effect device. The first movable member stops at the lower left position of the effect display device 5 as the origin position (retreat position). From the retracted position, it rises diagonally to the right, stops at the advanced position overlapping the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 5, and then performs an operation effect of returning to the retracted position again. The first movable member includes a rotation mechanism, first to third split pieces, and a slide mechanism. First to third split pieces are provided at the tip of the rotating mechanism. The first to third fragments form a predetermined figure at the time of the origin position when the united closed state is set. The rotating mechanism of the first movable member is rotated by the operation motor AK011 from the retracted position, which is the origin position, to the advanced position at the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5. Thus, after the first movable member has advanced to the central portion of the display screen of the effect display device 5, the first to third split pieces are opened by the operating motor AK012. On the other hand, when the first movable member is at the origin position, the first to third fragments cannot be opened. The slide mechanism of the first movable member is slid laterally by the operation motor AK013 after the rotation mechanism of the first movable member and the first to third split pieces are rotated to the advanced position. The slide mechanism of the first movable member sets the rotation mechanism and the first to third split pieces on the left side of the effect display device 5 with the time when the first movable member is at the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5 as the origin position. It is only necessary to be able to slide between the position and the right position.

  The second movable member stops at the position above the effect display device 5 as the origin position (retreat position). After descending from the retracted position and stopping at the advanced position overlapping the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 5, an operation effect of returning to the retracted position is performed. The second movable member is lowered by the operation motor AK014 from the evacuation position, which is the origin position, to the advancing position slightly above the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5, and is raised from the advancing position to the evacuation position. As described above, the second movable member performs an effect operation of simply reciprocating up and down by the driving force of the operation motor AK014.

  The origin position of the rotation mechanism of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK021. The origin positions of the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are detected by the origin sensor AK022. The origin position of the slide mechanism of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK023. The origin position of the second movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK024. The operation motor AK011 provides a driving force that enables the rotation mechanism of the first movable member to move between the origin position and the advance position. The operation motor AK012 provides a driving force that enables the first to third split pieces of the first movable member to move between the closed state and the open state at the origin position. The operation motor AK013 provides a driving force that enables the slide mechanism of the first movable member to move between the origin position and the left or right position of the effect display device 5. The operation motor AK014 provides a driving force that enables the second movable member to move between the origin position and the advanced position.

  The power-on operation by the first movable member and the second movable member includes a long initial operation and a short initial operation. The long initial operation is an initial operation for performing the same operation as a normal effect operation during execution of an effect accompanying the progress of a game. By performing the long initial operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not a problem occurs in the normal effect operation. The short initial operation is an operation in which a part of the operation in the normal effect operation is omitted, and is a return operation for returning the first movable member and the second movable member to the origin positions.

  When the long initial operation is performed as the power-on operation, first, as shown by a solid arrow 72KM01, the rotating mechanism of the first movable member is moved to the origin position (retreat position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK011. Is moved to an overlapping position on the front side of the central portion of the display screen of the effect display device 5 which is the advanced position. Subsequently, as indicated by a broken arrow 72AKM02, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved from the closed state at the origin position to the open state by the driving force of the operation motor AK012. Thereafter, as indicated by a broken arrow 72AKM03, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved from the open state to the closed state (origin position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK012. Next, as shown by solid arrows 72AKM04 to 72AKM06, the slide mechanism of the first movable member is moved from the origin position to the right movable position by the driving force of the operation motor AK013 and then moved to the left movable position. Then return to the origin position. Then, as shown by the solid line arrow 72AKM07, the rotating mechanism of the first movable member is returned from the advanced position to the original position (retreat position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK011. Thereafter, as shown by broken-line arrows 72AKM08 and 72AKM09, the second movable member is moved from the origin position (retreat position) to the advance position by the driving force of the operation motor AK014, and then returned to the origin position (retreat position).

  When the short initial operation is performed as the power-on operation, an operation in which a part of the long initial operation is omitted may be performed. For example, among the operations indicated by the arrows 72AKM01 to 72AKM09, control is performed to execute the operations indicated by the dashed arrows 72AKM02, 72AKM03, 72AKM08, and 72AKM09. In this case, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member cannot be moved from the closed state to the open state unless the rotation mechanism of the first movable member moves to the advanced position. Therefore, even in the short initial operation, the operation indicated by the solid arrows 72AKM01 and 72AKM07 is required. In the long initial operation, the operations of the first to third split pieces of the first movable member and the operations of the second movable member are performed such that the movement amount is larger than the operations indicated by the broken arrows 72AKM02, 72AKM03, 72AKM08, and 72AKM09. May be performed. In the short initial operation, the slide mechanism of the first movable member may be moved so that the amount of movement is smaller than the operation indicated by the solid arrows 72AKM04 to 72AKM06.

  In the short initial operation, at least a part of the operation may be omitted or added depending on the detection result by the origin sensors AK021 to AK024. For example, when the origin sensor AK022 is off and the other origin sensors are on, the operation of moving the first to third split pieces of the first movable member to the closed state, which is the origin position, is indicated by a broken arrow 72AKM03. The operation motor AK012 is driven to move in the direction. Then, when the origin sensor AK022 is turned on, the driving of the operation motor AK012 may be stopped. Thereafter, by moving the rotation mechanism of the first movable member so as to be smaller than the movement amount indicated by the solid arrows 72AKM01 and 72AKM07, the origin sensor AK021 is once turned off and then turned on. The motor AK021 is driven. Further, the operation motor AK024 may be driven such that the second movable member is moved as indicated by broken-line arrows 72AKM08 and 72AKM09 so that the origin sensor AK024 is once turned off and then turned on.

  FIG. 9-42 shows a control pattern used for driving the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014. The pattern data constituting these control patterns may be stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 in advance. In this embodiment, a short initial control pattern 72AKP01, a long initial control pattern 72AKP02, a production operation A control pattern 72AKP11, and a production operation B control pattern 72AKP12 are prepared in advance as control patterns of the movable member.

  The short initial control pattern 72AKP01 is a control pattern used to execute a short initial operation. The long initial control pattern AKP02 is a control pattern used to execute a long initial operation. The production operation A control pattern 72AKP11 is a control pattern used to execute the operation of the movable member included in the first production performed with the progress of the game, such as a reach production. The production operation B control pattern 72AKP12 is a control pattern used to execute an operation of a movable member included in a second production different from the first production performed in accordance with the progress of the game, such as a notice production, for example. . As the control pattern of the movable member, more control patterns may be prepared, or some control patterns may be prepared. The effect control CPU 120 may determine the drive contents of the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the pattern data read from the ROM 121, and control the operation of the movable member.

  FIG. 9-43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on command processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 regarding the characteristic unit 72AK of the present embodiment. This power-on command processing only needs to be executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main processing in the above embodiment. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 72AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines a command received from the main board 11 as in the above-described embodiment (steps 72AKS001 to 72AKS004). If it is determined in step 72AKS003 that the received command is the setting change start command (step 72AKS003; Yes), the game stop state start process is executed (step 72AKS005), as in the above-described embodiment. Control to start notification is performed (step 72AKS006).

  After performing the control in step 72AKS006, unlike the above embodiment, control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS007). For example, the effect control CPU 120 reads pattern data of the short initial control pattern 72AKP01 from a predetermined area of the ROM 121, and executes operation control of the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the read data. By performing the control in step 72AKS007, it is possible to perform control for executing a return operation of returning the movable member to the origin position when the setting change state is the change permission state. Note that, even in a period after the process proceeds to step 72AKS008 or later, the control in step 72AKS007 may be continuously performed until the short initial operation period ends, and control for executing the short initial operation may be performed.

  Subsequent to the control in step 72AKS007, it is determined whether or not the setting change is to be ended (step 72AKS008), as in the above embodiment. If the setting change is not to be ended (Step 72AKS008; No), Step 72AKS008 is repeatedly executed, and the process stands by. When it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is to be ended (step 72AKS008; Yes), control for ending the setting change notification is performed (step 72AKS009), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 72AKS010).

  After executing the game stop state end processing in step 72AKS010, unlike the above-described embodiment, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS011), and the process proceeds to step 72AKS014. In step 72AKS011, for example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the pattern data of the long initial control pattern 72AKP02 from a predetermined area of the ROM 121, and executes the operation control of the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the read data. By performing the control in step 72AKS011, it is possible to perform control for executing the long initial operation as the initial operation of the movable member after the setting change state as the change permission state ends. Further, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 72AKS011, when the setting change state is set as the change permission state, the long initial operation as the initial operation is executed following the short initial operation as the return operation. No control can be performed. Note that, even after the process proceeds to step 72AKS014, the control in step 72AKS011 may be continuously performed until the long initial operation period ends, and the control for performing the short initial operation may be performed.

  If it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command (step 72AKS001; Yes), control to execute a short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS012), and then control to execute a long initial operation. (Step 72AKS013). In step 72AKS013, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 72AKS012 is completed. By performing the control in steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013, when the power supply is not controlled to the setting change state as the change permission state with the start of the power supply, the long initial operation as the initial operation follows the short initial operation as the return operation. Control for executing the operation can be performed. Note that, even after the process proceeds to step 72AKS014, the control in step 72AKS013 may be continuously performed until the long initial operation period ends, and the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed. The control in step 72AKS011 and the control in step 72AKS013 may be executed by a common process using a common long initial control pattern 72AKP02. Alternatively, the control in step 72AKS011 and the control in step 72AKS013 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02.

  Thereafter, control for executing the initialization notification is performed (step 72AKS014). The control for executing the initialization notification may be performed, and then the control for executing the long initial operation may be performed. If it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, control for executing the initialization notification may be performed before control for executing the short initial operation is performed in step 72AKS012. .

  If it is determined in step 72AKS004 that the received command is a setting confirmation start command (step 72AKS004; Yes), a game stop state start process is executed (step 72AKS015), as in the above-described embodiment. Control for starting notification is performed (step 72AKS016). Subsequently, unlike the above embodiment, control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS017). By performing the control in step 72AKS017, the control for executing the return operation of returning the movable member to the origin position is in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It can be performed. Note that, even in the period after the process proceeds to step 72AKS018 or later, the control in step 72AKS017 may be continuously performed until the short initial operation period ends, and the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed.

  Subsequent to the control in step 72AKS017, it is determined whether or not the setting check is to be ended as in the above-described embodiment (step 72AKS018). If the setting confirmation is not completed (Step 72AKS018; No), Step 72AKS018 is repeatedly executed and the process stands by. If it is determined in step 72AKS018 that the setting confirmation is to be ended (step 72AKS018; Yes), control for ending the setting confirmation notification is performed (step 72AKS019), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 72AKS020).

  After executing the game stop state end processing in step 72AKS020, unlike the above-described embodiment, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS021), and the power-on command processing ends. By performing the control in step 72AKS021, after the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed, the long initial operation as the initial operation of the movable member is performed. Control can be performed. Further, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 72AKS021, the long initial operation as the initial operation follows the short initial operation as the return operation when the setting is in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value. Is not performed. Note that even after the power-on command processing ends, the control in step 72AKS021 may be continuously performed until the long initial operation period ends, and control for executing the long initial operation may be performed.

  If it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the received command is a power failure restoration designation command (step 72AKS002; Yes), control to execute a short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS022), and then control to execute a long initial operation. Is performed (step 72AKS023), and the power-on command processing ends. In step 72AKS023, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 72AKS022 is completed. By performing the control in steps 72AKS022 and 72AKS023, when the power supply is not controlled to the setting change state as the change permission state with the start of power supply, the long initial operation is the initial operation following the short initial operation which is the return operation. Control for executing the operation can be performed. Note that, even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 72AKS023 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and control for executing the long initial operation may be performed. The control in step 72AKS021 and the control in step 72AKS023 may be executed by common processing using a common long initial control pattern 72AKP02. Alternatively, the control in step 72AKS021 and the control in step 72AKS023 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02.

(Explanation of Modified Example Related to Characteristic Part 72AK)
FIG. 9-44 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on command processing executed in a modification of the characteristic unit 72AK. In the power-on command processing in this modification, when it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command (step 72AKS001; Yes), the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS010. Thereafter, control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS031), control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS032), and the process proceeds to step 72AKS014 to perform control for executing the initialization notification. If it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the contents stored in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 are initialized (cleared) with the start of power supply by turning on the power. Correspondingly, the control in step 72AKS014 is executed to execute the initialization notification. When this initialization notification is executed, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is executed, so that the control to execute the long initial operation as the initial operation following the short initial operation as the return operation can be performed. . Also, even after executing the game stop state end processing in step 72AKS010, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is executed, so that the setting change state as the change permission state ends and the short-circuit operation in which the return operation is performed. Subsequent to the initial operation, control for executing a long initial operation as an initial operation can be performed. As described above, when the received command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001 and after the game stop state ending process is executed in step 72AKS010, the control in common steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed. In addition, control can be performed to execute the long initial operation following the short initial operation.

  In the power-on command processing in this modified example, when it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the received command is the power failure recovery designation command (step 72AKS002; Yes), the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS020. Thereafter, control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS033), control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS034), and the power-on command processing is terminated. If it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the received command is a power outage restoration designation command, the contents stored in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 are restored to the contents stored at the time of the power outage with the start of power supply by turning on the power. . When such a power failure recovery is executed, the control in steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is executed, so that the control to execute the long initial operation as the initial operation following the short initial operation as the return operation is performed. it can. Further, even after executing the game stop state end processing in step 72AKS020, the control in steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is executed, so that the setting confirmation for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed. After the end of the state, control for executing a long initial operation as an initial operation following the short initial operation as a return operation can be performed. As described above, the control in steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is performed in common when the received command is determined to be the power failure recovery notification command in step 72AKS002 and after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS020. In addition, control can be performed to execute the long initial operation following the short initial operation.

  In the short initial operation and the long initial operation, control may be performed in response to initialization notification, or control may be performed without initialization notification. In the short initial operation and the long initial operation, control may be performed when power failure recovery notification is performed, or control may be performed without power failure recovery notification. In addition, after the control for executing the effect accompanying the progress of the game is started, the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed based on the establishment of the return operation condition. After the control for performing the effect accompanying the progress of the game is started, the control for performing the long initial operation may be performed based on the establishment of the initial operation condition.

  The configuration of the movable member is not limited to the form including the first movable member and the second movable member, and at least a short initial operation as a return operation and a long initial operation as an initial operation can be performed, In an effect accompanying the progress of the game, any effect can be used as long as it can be operated in a predetermined operation mode. The short initial operation and the long initial operation may be any ones arbitrarily specified according to the configuration of the movable member.

  As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 72AK, control for executing the short initial operation is performed in step 72AKS007. In this way, when the power supply is started by turning on the power and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state in which the setting value change is permitted, the movable member such as the first movable member or the second movable member is moved to the origin position. The control for executing the return operation for returning to the state is performed. Thereby, when the control for changing the set value is performed, the movable member is returned to the origin position, so that the work for changing the set value is not hindered by the movable member, and the work for changing the set value is performed. Can be prevented from occurring. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 72AK, if it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the control in steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013 is performed, so that the short initial operation as a return operation is performed. Subsequently, control for executing a long initial operation as an initial operation is performed. On the other hand, when the short initial operation is executed by the control in step 72AKS007, the control for executing the long initial operation is not performed until it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is completed. If the long initial operation that is the initial operation is performed in the setting change state, the execution of the setting change notification is hindered, and there is a possibility that appropriate notification cannot be performed. Therefore, control for executing the long initial operation is performed after the setting change state ends, and control for executing the long initial operation is not performed when the setting is in the check state. As described above, when the setting change state is set as the change permission state, the long initial operation, which is the initial operation by the movable member, is not performed, and the setting value change work is not hindered. It is possible to prevent trouble in changing the value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  If it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is to be terminated, control is performed in step 72AKS011 to execute the long initial operation. In this way, after the setting change state as the change permission state ends, control to execute only the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, is performed. Thus, when it is possible to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value, it is possible to prevent useless operation of the movable member and reduce a control load for operating the movable member. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  In the power-on command processing in the modified example of the characteristic unit 72AK, when it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed, thereby performing a return operation. Control is performed to execute a long initial operation which is an initial operation following the short initial operation. At this time, the control for executing the initialization notification is performed by performing the control in step 72AKS014. In this way, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) with the start of power supply by turning on the power, so that when the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized, the initialization notification is given. When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute a short initial operation as a return operation and a long initial operation as an initial operation. Also, when it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is to be ended, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 performs the long initial operation as the initial operation following the short initial operation as the return operation. Perform control. Thereby, in order to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value, the operation of the movable member can be shared, and the control load for operating the movable member can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 72AK, in step AKS017, control for executing the short initial operation is performed. In this manner, when the power supply is started and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value, the movable members such as the first movable member and the second movable member are moved to the origin position. The control for executing the return operation for returning to the state is performed. Thereafter, if it is determined in step 72AKS018 that the setting confirmation is to be ended, control is performed to execute a long initial operation in step 72AKS021. In this way, after the setting confirmation state ends, control for executing the long initial operation as the initial operation is performed. If the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, is performed in the setting confirmation state, the execution of the setting confirmation notification is hindered, and appropriate notification may not be performed. Therefore, control for executing the long initial operation is performed after the setting confirmation state ends, and control for executing the long initial operation is not performed when the setting confirmation state is established. Thereby, in order to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value, the set value can be easily checked by preventing the long initial operation, which is the initial operation by the movable member, from being performed when the setting is in the check state. To do. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

(Explanation of the means relating to the characteristic portion 72AK)
Regarding the above-described characteristic portion 72AK, a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings with different degrees of advantage for a player is described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine for returning a movable member to an origin position, for example, there is a gaming machine described in JP-A-2016-221154. However, in the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2016-22154, the case where the change of the setting and the operation of the movable member conflict is not considered. For this reason, there is a possibility that the operation of changing to a plurality of set values having different degrees of advantage for the player may be affected. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 72AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing a trouble in an operation of changing a set value,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of performing a game and being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage for the player is different based on the set value;
Setting control means (for example, CPU 103 for executing the processing of steps Sa6 and Sa12) capable of controlling a change permission state for permitting the setting value to be changed by the setting means with the start of power supply;
A movable member operable in accordance with the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member operated by the operation motors AK011 to AK013, a second movable member operated by the operation motor AK014, and the like);
At least a movable control means (for example, a step) capable of controlling a return operation (for example, a short initial operation or the like) for returning the movable member to the origin position and an initial operation (for example, a long initial operation) by the movable member. Effect control CPU 120 for executing command processing at power-on of AKS012).
The movable control unit performs control to execute the return operation when the change is permitted (for example, execution of step 72AKS007).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to such a configuration, the return operation of returning the movable member to the origin position is performed in the change permission state, so that it is possible to prevent the trouble in the work of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 relating to the characteristic portion 72AK,
The movable control means,
When the change permission state is not controlled with the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013),
When the change is permitted, the control for executing the initial operation following the return operation is not performed (for example, execution of step 72AKS008).
A gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 72AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the movable member from performing the initial operation when the change is permitted, thereby preventing trouble in the work of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic portion 72AK,
The movable control means performs control for executing only the initial operation after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 72AKS011).
It may be a gaming machine of the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 72AK.
In such a configuration, useless operation by the movable member can be prevented, and at the same time, it is possible to prevent trouble in changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic portion 72AK,
When the gaming machine is initialized with the start of power supply, initialization notifying means for executing initialization notification (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, effect control CPU 120 for executing step 72AKS014). Etc.)
The movable control means,
When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS031, 72AKS032 accompanying execution of step 72AKS014),
After the end of the change permission state, control for executing the initial operation following the return operation is performed (for example, execution of steps 72AKS031, 72AKS032 following steps 72AKS005 to 72AKS010).
It may be a gaming machine of the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 72AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load by sharing the operation of the movable member and prevent the setting value changing work from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 relating to the characteristic portion 72AK,
A setting confirmation control unit (for example, a CPU 103 that executes a setting confirmation process in step AKS002) capable of controlling a setting confirmation state for confirming a setting value set by the setting unit;
The movable control means,
When the setting is confirmed, control for executing the return operation is performed (for example, execution of step 72AKS017).
After the setting confirmation state ends, control for executing the initial operation is performed (for example, execution of step 72AKS021).
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to means 4 relating to the characteristic portion 72AK.
In such a configuration, when the setting is in the setting confirmation state, the initial operation by the movable member is not performed, so that the set value can be easily confirmed and the trouble of changing the set value can be prevented.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 73AK)
FIG. 9-45 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on command process executed by the effect control CPU 120 regarding the characteristic unit 73AK of the present embodiment. This power-on command processing only needs to be executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main processing in the above embodiment. Regarding the characteristic portion 73AK, the operation content of the short initial operation and the long initial operation may be the same as the content of the characteristic portion 72AK of the present embodiment. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines the command received from the main board 11 as in the above embodiment (steps 73AKS001 to 73AKS004). If it is determined in step 73AKS003 that the received command is a setting change start command (step 73AKS003; Yes), a game stop state start process is executed (step 73AKS005), as in the above-described embodiment. Control for starting notification is performed (step 73AKS006).

  After performing the control in step 73AKS006, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change (step 73AKS007). If the setting change is not to be ended (Step 73AKS007; No), Step 73AKS007 is repeatedly executed and the process stands by. If it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is to be ended (step 73AKS007; Yes), control for ending the setting change notification is performed (step 73AKS008), and a game stop state end process is executed (step 73AKS009). As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, the control for executing the short initial operation as the return operation of returning the movable member to the origin position is not performed when the setting change state is set as the change permission state. .

  If it is determined in step 73AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command (step 73AKS001; Yes), after executing the game stop state end processing in step 73AKS009, control to execute the short initial operation is performed. (Step 73AKS010), and then control to execute the long initial operation is performed (Step 73AKS011). In step 73AKS011, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 73AKS010 ends. By performing the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011, when the power supply is not controlled to the setting change state as the change permission state with the start of power supply, the long initial operation as the initial operation follows the short initial operation as the return operation. Can be controlled. Further, when the setting is changed to the setting change state as the change permission state along with the start of the power supply, the control to execute the short initial operation as the return operation after the setting change state ends can be performed. Alternatively, when the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled along with the start of the power supply, after the setting change state ends, the short initial operation as the return operation is followed by the long initial operation as the initial operation. Control for executing the operation can be performed.

  Thereafter, control for executing the initialization notification is performed (step 73AKS012). Note that the control for executing the initialization notification may be performed, and then the control for executing the short initial operation or the long initial operation may be performed. Alternatively, after performing control to execute the short initial operation, control to execute initialization notification may be performed, and then control to execute the long initial operation may be performed.

  If it is determined in step 73AKS004 that the received command is a setting confirmation start command (step 73AKS004; Yes), a game stop state start process is executed (step 73AKS013), as in the above-described embodiment. Control for starting notification is performed (step 73AKS014). Subsequently, control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 73AKS015). By executing the control in step 73AKS015, the control for executing the return operation of returning the movable member to the origin position is in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It can be performed. Note that, even in a period after the process proceeds to step 73AKS016 or later, the control in step 73AKS015 may be continuously performed until the short initial operation period ends, and control for executing the short initial operation may be performed.

  Subsequent to the control in step 73AKS015, it is determined whether or not to end the setting confirmation (step 73AKS016). If the setting check is not completed (Step 73AKS016; No), Step 73AKS016 is repeatedly executed and the process stands by. If it is determined in step 73AKS016 that the setting confirmation is to be ended (step 73AKS016; Yes), control for ending the setting confirmation notification is performed (step 73AKS017), and a game stop state end process is executed (step 73AKS018). Next, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 73AKS019), and the power-on command processing ends. By executing the control in step 73AKS019, a long initial operation, which is an initial operation of the movable member, is executed after the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 ends. Control can be performed. In addition, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 73AKS019, the long initial operation as the initial operation is performed after the short initial operation as the return operation when the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value is established. Is not performed. Note that, even after the power-on command processing ends, the control in step 73AKS019 may be continuously performed until the long initial operation period ends, and control for executing the long initial operation may be performed.

  If it is determined in step 73AKS002 that the received command is a power failure recovery designation command (step 73AKS002; Yes), control for executing a short initial operation is performed (step 73AKS020), and control for executing a long initial operation is subsequently performed. (Step 73AKS021), the power-on command processing ends. In step 73AKS021, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 73AKS020 is completed. By executing the control in steps 73AKS020 and 73AKS021, when the power supply is not controlled to the setting change state as the change permission state with the start of power supply, the long initial operation is the initial operation following the short initial operation which is the return operation. Control for executing the operation can be performed. Note that even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 73AKS021 may be continuously performed until the long initial operation period ends, and control for executing the long initial operation may be performed. The control in step 73AKS019 and the control in step 73AKS021 may be executed by a common process using a common long initial control pattern 72AKP02, as in the case of the characteristic portion 72AK. Alternatively, the control in step 73AKS019 and the control in step 73AKS021 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02, as in the case of the characteristic portion 72AK.

  FIG. 9-46 shows the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01 displayed during the execution of the setting confirmation notification for the characteristic portion 73AK. On the setting confirmation notifying screen 73AKD01, a character image for notifying a message of "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed, and a history of the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be displayed. The history of the setting values may be cumulatively stored on the effect control board 12 side by storing the setting value information together with the RTC information in a backup area of the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12, for example. Alternatively, the history of the set values is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control board 12 by storing the set value information together with the RTC information in a non-volatile storage device (such as a flash memory) provided separately from the RAM 122. It may be stored cumulatively on the side. Alternatively, the set value history is stored in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 in the backup area together with the set value information in the backup area, and a setting confirmation start command is transmitted. By transmitting a set value history command prepared in advance as an effect control command capable of specifying a history of set values from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the effect control board 12 side supplies power. May be specified at the start of the process.

  When the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01 is displayed, if the movable member is stopped at a position deviating from the origin position, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the display screen of the effect display device 5 and grasp the history of the set values. It becomes difficult to do. Therefore, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, the control in step 73AKS015 is executed, so that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, Control is performed to execute a short initial operation as a return operation for returning the member to the home position. As described above, when the setting is controlled to the setting confirmation state in response to the start of the power supply, unlike the case of being controlled to the setting change state, the short initial operation as the return operation is performed. The history of the set values that can be displayed on the 73AKD01 can be easily grasped by the staff at the game arcade or the like. On the other hand, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 73AKS018, the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. In this case, the control for executing the long initial operation as the initial operation following the short initial operation as the return operation is not performed. As described above, when the setting is controlled in the setting confirmation state in response to the start of power supply, in this setting confirmation state, the short initial operation as the return operation is performed, while the long initial operation as the initial operation is performed. Since the operation is not executed, the long initial operation is executed after the staff of the game hall or the like can easily grasp the history of the set values that can be displayed on the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01. In this case, it is possible to prevent the history of the set values from being difficult to grasp due to the movable member.

  It should be noted that the history of the set values may be displayed even when the setting is changed to the changed state. In this case, control may be performed to execute a short initial operation for returning the movable member to the origin position when the setting change state is set as the change permission state. As described above, when the history of the set value can be displayed by being controlled to the setting confirmation state along with the start of the power supply, the short initial operation as the return operation is performed, and the set value is set. May be easily grasped.

  As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, if it is determined in step 73AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, control is performed to execute the short initial operation in step 73AKS010. . On the other hand, if it is determined in step 73AKS003 that the received command is the setting change start command, the control for executing the short initial operation is not performed until it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is to be ended. Accordingly, when the control for changing the set value is performed, the short initial operation, which is the return operation for returning the movable member to the home position, is not performed, so that the change operation of the set value is not hindered by the return operation. In this way, it is possible to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, after it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is to be ended, the control in step 73AKS010 is performed, so that the control to execute the short initial operation as the return operation is performed. As described above, since the control for executing the short initial operation, which is the return operation, is performed after the setting change state as the change permission state ends, the movable operation is performed in order to prevent the setting value change work from being hindered. An operation of appropriately returning the member to the origin position can be performed.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, if it is determined in step 73AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed, so that the short initial operation as a return operation is performed. Subsequently, control for executing a long initial operation as an initial operation is performed. At this time, the control for executing the initialization notification is performed by performing the control in step 73AKS012. In this way, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) with the start of power supply by turning on the power, so that when the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized, the initialization notification is given. When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute a short initial operation as a return operation and a long initial operation as an initial operation. Also, when it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is to be ended, the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed, so that the long initial operation as the initial operation is performed following the short initial operation as the return operation. Perform control. Thereby, in order to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value, the operation of the movable member can be shared, and the control load for operating the movable member can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  On the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01, the history of the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be displayed. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, if it is determined in step 73AK004 that the received command is a setting confirmation start command, control is performed in step 73AKS015 to execute a short initial operation. Thus, when the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01 which is a setting confirmation display capable of displaying the history of the setting values is being displayed, the control for executing the short initial operation as the returning operation is performed. This makes it possible to easily grasp the setting confirmation display when preventing the setting value changing operation from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  The effect control CPU 120 controls the execution of the effect according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, when the command 9100H serving as the setting change start command is received in step 73AKS003, it is determined that the received command is the setting change start command. The command 9100H serving as a setting change start command transmitted from the main board 11 is different from the command 9000H serving as a RAM clear notification command, the command 9200H serving as a power failure recovery designation command, and the command 9400H serving as a setting check start command. In this way, when the power supply is started by turning on the power and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state in which the setting value change is permitted, a command as information different from the case where the setting is not controlled is transmitted. Is done. Thereby, in order to prevent a trouble in the work of changing the set value, it is possible to reduce the control load regarding the effect. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

(Explanation of the means relating to the characteristic part 73AK)
Regarding the above-described characteristic portion 73AK, a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different degrees of advantage for a player is described in, for example, JP-A-2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine for returning a movable member to an origin position, for example, there is a gaming machine described in JP-A-2016-221154. However, in the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2016-22154, the case where the change of the setting and the operation of the movable member conflict is not considered. For this reason, there is a possibility that the operation of changing to a plurality of set values having different degrees of advantage for the player may be affected. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing a trouble in a setting value changing operation,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of performing a game and being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage for the player is different based on the set value;
Setting control means (for example, CPU 103 for executing the processing of steps Sa6 and Sa12) capable of controlling a change permission state for permitting the setting value to be changed by the setting means with the start of power supply;
A movable member operable in accordance with the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member operated by the operation motors AK011 to AK013, a second movable member operated by the operation motor AK014, and the like);
At least movable control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing a power-on command process in step AKS012) capable of executing a return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position,
The movable control means,
When the control is not controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, control for executing the return operation is performed (for example, execution of step 73AKS010).
When the change is permitted, the control for executing the return operation is not performed (for example, execution of steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to such a configuration, since the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is not executed in the change permission state, it is possible to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 73AK,
The movable control unit performs control for executing the return operation after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 73AKS010).
It may be a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 73AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately operate the movable member and to prevent trouble in changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK,
When the gaming machine is initialized with the start of power supply, initialization notification means for executing initialization notification (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, effect control CPU 120 for executing step 73AKS012). Etc.)
The movable control means,
When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute an initial operation by the movable member following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 73AKS010 to 73AKS012),
After the end of the change permission state, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of step 73AKS010 following steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009).
The game machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 73AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load by sharing the operation of the movable member and prevent the setting value changing work from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK,
Setting display means (for example, effect display device 5 or the like) capable of executing a setting confirmation display for confirming the set value set by the setting means,
The setting display means is capable of displaying a history of the set values set by the setting means in the setting confirmation display (for example, displaying a setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01).
The movable control means performs control to execute the return operation when the setting confirmation display is being executed, and does not perform control to execute the initial operation (for example, execution of steps 73AKS015 and 73AKS016).
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 3 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK.
In such a configuration, when the setting confirmation display is being executed, the initial operation by the movable member is not executed, so that the setting confirmation display can be easily grasped, and there is a problem in the work of changing the set value. Can be prevented.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK,
An effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing a command analysis process of AKS015) for controlling the execution of the effect based on information from the game control means,
The game control means transmits information (for example, a command 9100H serving as a setting change start command) different from the case of not being controlled to the change permission state when being controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply. ,
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 4 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the effect control means and prevent the setting value changing work from being hindered.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 74AK)
FIG. 9-47 shows an example of the configuration of the effect control pattern 74AKP01 used for executing the confirmation effect regarding the characteristic portion 74AK of the present embodiment. The pattern data constituting the effect control pattern 74AKP01 may be stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 in advance. The confirmation effect is controlled to be executable based on establishment of a predetermined confirmation effect condition after power supply is started by turning on the power. The confirmation effect of the characteristic unit 74AK includes the output of a confirmation sound for outputting the sound of the trumpet from the left speaker 8L twice, the output of the confirmation sound for outputting the sound of the drum twice from the right speaker 8R, and the output of the stick controller 31A. Confirmation vibration for driving two sets of vibration motors built in the operation rod (lever) in a predetermined pattern is included. The effect control pattern 74AKP01 includes data indicating the confirmation effect process timer initial value 74AKJ00, and enables setting of the initial value of the check effect process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, for example. In addition, the effect control pattern 74AKP01 includes first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 associated with the confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKJ01, second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02 associated with the confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKJ02, and confirmation. The first confirmation effect control data 74AKD03 associated with the effect process timer determination value 74AKJ03 is included. The first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 is used to control the output of a confirmation sound for outputting the sound of the trumpet twice from the left speaker 8L. The second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02 is used to control the output of a confirmation sound for outputting the drum sound twice from the right speaker 8R. The third confirmation effect control data 74AKD03 is used for controlling confirmation vibration for driving two sets of vibration motors built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A in a predetermined pattern. When controlling the execution of the confirmation effect, the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer is updated, and when any one of the confirmation effect process timer determination values 74AKJ01 to 74AKJ03 is matched, the first to third confirmations corresponding to the matched determination values are performed. By performing the control using the effect control data 74AKD03, it is possible to output the confirmation sound and execute the confirmation vibration.

  During the execution of the confirmation effect, a part or all of the light emitting members included in the game effect lamp 9 may be turned on. For example, when the confirmation effect is started, the lighting of the light emitting member is started, and the output of the confirmation sound is started from the left speaker 8L. When the output of the confirmation sound by the left speaker 8L ends, the output of the confirmation sound from the right speaker 8R starts. When the output of the confirmation sound by the right speaker 8R ends, the confirmation vibration by the vibration motor built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A starts. Then, the confirmation vibration by the vibration motor built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A ends, the light emitting member is turned off, and the confirmation effect ends. In the confirmation effect, after the power supply is started by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, an operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected within a predetermined confirmation reception period, and the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. Then, the execution is started. Production of any one of output of a confirmation sound by the left speaker 8L, output of a confirmation sound by the right speaker 8R, and confirmation vibration by a vibration motor built in an operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A. Is performed, the control for executing another effect is not performed. As described above, when any one of the output of the confirmation sound and the confirmation vibration included in the confirmation effect is performed, the control may be performed so as not to execute another effect. Since the output of the confirmation sound and the confirmation vibration are executed at different timings in this way, it is easy for the staff at the game hall or the like to easily determine whether or not the effect using each of the effect devices can be normally executed. Can be.

  FIG. 9-48 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 for the characteristic unit 74AK. This effect control main process may be executed in place of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of the characteristic unit 74AK, the effect control CPU 120 executes the initialization process (step 74AKS011) and the power-on command process (step 74AKS012) in the same manner as in the above embodiment, and then turns on the timer interrupt flag. Is determined (step 74AKS013), and if it is off (step 74AKS013; No), step 74AKS013 is repeatedly executed to stand by. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on (step 74AKS013; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step 74AKS014), command analysis processing (step 74AKS015), and effect control process processing (Step 74AKS016) and the effect random number updating process (Step 74AKS017) are executed in order. Further, in the effect control main process of the characteristic unit 74AK, the confirmation effect control process (step 74AKS018) is executed, and then the process returns to step 74AKS013.

  FIG. 9-49 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step 74AKS018 as the confirmation effect control processing. In the confirmation effect control process, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the initialization notification has been started (step 74AKS031). For example, in the power-on command processing of the above-described embodiment, the initialization notification is started by performing the control in step AKS030. Thereafter, when the determination in step 74AKS031 is first performed, it may be determined that the initialization notification has started. An initialization notification start flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and when the initialization notification start flag is on, it may be determined that the initialization notification has started.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the start of the initialization notification has started (step 74AKS031; Yes), control for starting the confirmation reception period is performed (step 74AKS032). The confirmation reception period may be started when the initialization notification is started, and may be ended when a predetermined confirmation reception time such as 30 seconds or 1 minute elapses.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the initialization notification has not been started (step 74AKS031; No), it is determined whether or not a confirmation reception period has been reached (step 74AKS033). When the confirmation reception period is started in step 74AKS032 or when it is determined in step 74AKS033 that it is the confirmation reception period (step 74AKS033; Yes), it is determined whether the variable display has been started (step 74AKS033; Yes). 74AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may determine that the variable display has been started by receiving the first change start command and the second change start command transmitted from the main board 11.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS034 that the variable display is to be started (step 74AKS034; Yes), control for canceling the confirmation acceptance period is performed (step 74AKS035), and the confirmation effect control process ends. As described above, when the variable display is started during the confirmation reception period, the confirmation reception period is stopped, and the restriction is made so that the confirmation effect condition is not satisfied. By canceling the confirmation accepting period with the start of the variable display, it is possible to control the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game and the execution of the confirmation effect so that the confirmation effect is appropriately executed.

  If it is determined in Step 74AKS034 that the variable display has not been started (Step 74AKS034; No), it is determined whether or not an operation for starting the confirmation effect has been detected (Step 74AKS036). In step 74AKS036, when an operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected, it may be determined that an operation for starting the confirmation effect has been detected. At this time, if there is no motion detection (step 74AKS036; No), the confirmation effect control process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the motion is detected (step 74AKS036; Yes), the effect control pattern 74AKP01 used to execute the confirmation effect is read from a predetermined area of the ROM 121 (step 74AKS037), and the confirmation effect process is performed. The timer initial value 74AKJ00 is set as the confirmation effect process timer (step 74AKS038). In addition, it is set so that the timer value is determined based on the first confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKD01 (step 74AKS039), and the process proceeds to step 74AKS046. If it is determined in step 74AKS036 that an operation has been detected and a setting for executing a confirmation effect is performed, control for ending the confirmation reception period may be performed.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS033 that it is not the confirmation reception period (step 74AKS033; No), it is determined whether or not a confirmation effect is being performed (step 74AKS040). In step 74AKS040, for example, when measurement of the elapsed time by the confirmation effect process timer has started, it may be determined that the confirmation effect is being performed. At this time, if the confirmation effect is not being performed (step 74AKS040; No), the confirmation effect control process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the confirmation effect is being performed (step 74AKS040; Yes), it is determined whether the variable display has been started (step 74AKS041). When it is determined that the variable display is to be started (step 74AKS041; Yes), control for stopping the confirmation effect is performed (step 74AKS042), and the confirmation effect control process ends. In this way, when the variable display is started during the confirmation effect, by stopping the execution of the confirmation effect, control is performed so that the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game and the execution of the confirmation effect do not overlap. , The confirmation effect can be appropriately executed.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS041 that the variable display has not been started (step 74AKS041; No), update control of the confirmation effect process timer is performed (step 74AKS043). Next, it is determined whether or not a timeout has occurred in the confirmation effect process timer (step 74AKS044). At this time, if a timeout has occurred (step 74AKS044; Yes), control for ending the confirmation effect is performed (step 74AKS045), and the confirmation effect control process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timeout has not occurred (step 74AKS044; No), it is determined whether or not the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer matches the determination value (step 74AKS046). If it does not match the determination value (step 74AKS046; No), the confirmation effect control process ends.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS046 that the value matches the determination value (step 74AKS046; Yes), an effect using the confirmation effect control data corresponding to the determination value is started (step 74AKS047). In addition, after setting such that the timer value is determined based on the confirmation effect process timer determination value stored next in the effect control pattern 74AKP01 (step 74AKS048), the confirmation effect control process ends.

  FIG. 9-50 is a timing chart showing a control example of the confirmation effect regarding the characteristic portion 74AK. FIG. 9-50 (A) shows that the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected when the power supply is started by turning on the power, but the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on is not detected. Correspondingly, a case where the setting is not controlled to the change state is shown. 9-50 (B) shows that when power supply is started by turning on the power, an operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected, and an operation of switching the lock switch 51 on is detected. Corresponds to the case where the state is controlled to the setting change state. FIG. 9-50 (C) shows the control content at each timing.

  When the power is not turned on at the timing 74AKT01 and the setting is not controlled, the effect control board 12 determines that, for example, the effect control CPU 120 has received the RAM clear notification command at the timing 74AKT02. . In the power-on command processing of the above-described embodiment, when the received command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step AKS021, the control in step AKS030 is performed, and the initialization notification is started. Then, in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018 included in the effect control main process of the characteristic unit 74AK, it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the initialization notification is to be started, and the confirmation reception period is started by the control of step 74AKS032. You. If an operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at the timing 74AKT03 during the confirmation detection period, it is determined that the confirmation effect start operation has been detected at step 74AKS036 of the confirmation effect control process. The control for executing the confirmation effect, such as steps 74AKS037 to 74AKS048, is started. By starting the control for executing the confirmation effect in this manner, a plurality of types of first to third confirmation effects are provided using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01. The effects are executed in order. Thereafter, at timing 74AKT04, it is determined in step 74AKS044 of the confirmation effect control process that the confirmation effect process timer has timed out, and the control in step 74AKS045 is performed, thereby ending the confirmation effect.

  On the other hand, when the control is changed to the setting change state with the start of power supply by turning on the power at the timing 74AKT11, in the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 issues a setting change start command at the timing 74AKT12. It is determined that it has been received. In the power-on command processing of the above-described embodiment, since the received command is determined to be the setting change start command in step AKS023, the game stop state start processing in step AKS025 is executed, and then the control in step AKS026 is performed. Is performed, and the setting change notification is started. At this time, other than when the setting change end command is received, control for continuously executing the setting change notification is performed, and control for executing the initialization notification is not started. After that, when the setting change end command transmitted from the main board 11 is received at the timing 74AKT13, it is determined that the setting change is ended in the step AKS027 of the power-on command processing, so that the steps AKS028 and AKS029 follow. , The control of step AKS030 is performed, and the initialization notification is started.

  In this way, when the initialization notification by the control of step AKS030 is started at timing 74AKT13, in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018 included in the effect control main process of the characteristic portion 74AK, the initialization notification is performed in step 74AKS031. Is started, and the control in step 74AKS032 starts the confirmation acceptance period. Therefore, at timing 74AKT13, the confirmation reception period starts with the start of the initialization notification. When the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at the timing 74AKT14 within the confirmation reception period, it is determined that the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected in step 74AKS036 of the confirmation effect control process, and the confirmation effect control process is performed. The control for executing the confirmation effect, such as steps 74AKS037 to 74AKS048, is started. By starting the control for executing the confirmation effect in this manner, a plurality of types of first to third confirmation effects are provided using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01. The effects are executed in order. Thereafter, at timing 74AKT15, it is determined in step 74AKS044 of the confirmation effect control process that the confirmation effect process timer has timed out, and the control in step 74AKS045 is performed, thereby ending the confirmation effect.

  The effect included in the confirmation effect may be an effect using any effect device provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in addition to or instead of the confirmation vibration by driving the vibration motor built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A, the confirmation vibration by driving the vibration motor built in the push button 31B. May be executed.

  As described above, in the effect control main processing of the characteristic unit 74AK, the power-on command processing is executed in step 74AKS012 in the same manner as in the above embodiment, and then the confirmation effect control processing is executed in step 74AKS018. In the power-on command processing, the game stop state start processing is executed in, for example, step AKS025 or step AKS031. After the game stop state start process is executed, the reception of a command different from the setting change end command or the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and regulation is exercised so that control relating to normal effects is not executed. In this case, the control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step AKS021 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, in step AKS030, control for executing the initialization notification is performed. Thereafter, in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018, when the confirmation effect condition is satisfied based on, for example, the determination of the start of the initialization notification in step 74AKS031, the process proceeds to step 74AKS037 and thereafter to execute the confirmation effect. Perform control to be executed. In this manner, when the power supply is started by turning on the power and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state in which the setting value change is permitted, the control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed. Thereby, the control for changing the set value is given priority over the control for executing the confirmation effect, so that it is possible to prevent a trouble in the work for changing the set value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

  In the power-on command processing, control in steps AKS025 to AKS030 is performed in accordance with the setting change state. After that, by executing the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process, the control for executing the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition after the setting change state as the change permission state ends. Do. This makes it possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect when preventing the setting value changing work from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

  The push button 31B and the push sensor 35B are configured to detect an operation such as a pressing operation by a player. In the confirmation effect control process of the characteristic unit 74AK, the control in step 74AKS032 is executed, so that the confirmation accepting period is reached, and thereafter, in step 74AKS036, it is determined that the start operation is detected, so that the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. . This makes it possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect when preventing the setting value changing work from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

  When executing the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process of the characteristic unit 74AK, the control in step 74AKS032 is executed, so that the storage contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) without being controlled to the setting confirmation state. ), The confirmation reception period is the same as the case where the setting confirmation state ends. The control for executing the confirmation effect is performed according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation reception period. Thereby, in order to prevent a trouble in the work of changing the set value, it is possible to standardize the control regarding the execution of the confirmation effect and reduce the control load of the confirmation effect. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

  The effect control pattern 74AKP01 used in the characteristic portion 74AK includes the first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 and the second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02, thereby enabling control to output a confirmation sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Thus, the confirmation effect includes the output of the confirmation sound by the speakers 8L and 8R serving as the sound output means. This makes it possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect when preventing the setting value changing work from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

(Explanation of the means relating to the characteristic part 74AK)
Regarding the above-described characteristic portion 74AK, a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different degrees of advantage for a player is described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine for performing control for outputting a confirmation sound, there is one described in, for example, JP-A-2016-220833. However, in the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-220833, no consideration has been given to the case where the setting change and the confirmation effect compete. For this reason, there is a possibility that the operation of changing to a plurality of set values having different degrees of advantage for the player may be affected. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 74AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing a trouble in a setting value changing operation,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of performing a game and being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage for the player is different based on the set value;
Setting control means (for example, CPU 103 for executing the processing of steps Sa6 and Sa12) capable of controlling a change permission state for permitting the setting value to be changed by the setting means with the start of power supply;
Effect means (eg, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of executing effects,
After the power supply is started, a confirmation control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing a confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018) capable of executing a confirmation effect control by the effect means based on establishment of a confirmation effect condition; With
The confirmation control means,
When the control is not controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect in accordance with establishment of the confirmation effect condition (for example, execution of step 74AKS018 after execution of steps AKS021, AKS030, etc. ),
When the change is permitted, the control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed (for example, execution of steps AKS025 to AKS029).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to such a configuration, since the confirmation effect is not executed when the change is permitted, it is possible to prevent a trouble in the operation of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 74AK,
The confirmation control means performs control for executing the confirmation effect in accordance with establishment of the confirmation effect condition after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 74AKS018 after executing steps AKS025 to AKS030, and the like). ),
A gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 74AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the setting value changing work from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK,
Game detecting means (for example, a push button 31B, a push sensor 35B, etc.) capable of detecting an action by the player;
The confirmation effect condition is satisfied based on the detection of the operation by the game detection means during the confirmation reception period (for example, execution of step 74AKS036).
The gaming machine may be the gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 74AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the setting value changing work from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK,
The confirmation control means, when initialization is performed without being controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, when the change permission state ends, the confirmation effect condition in a common confirmation reception period The control for executing the confirmation effect is performed according to the establishment (for example, execution of steps 74AKS033 and 74AKS036),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 3 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK.
In such a configuration, the execution of the confirmation effect is made common, and it is possible to prevent the trouble in the work of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK,
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of outputting a production sound,
The confirmation effect includes an output of a sound for confirmation by the sound output unit (for example, execution of step 74AKS047 using the first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01, the second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to means 4 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the setting value changing work from being hindered.

(Explanation about 75AK)
FIG. 9-51 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on command processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 regarding the characteristic portion 75AK of the present embodiment. This power-on command processing only needs to be executed in step 74AKS012 of the effect control main processing in the characteristic part 74AK of the above embodiment. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 75AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines a command received from the main board 11 as in the above-described embodiment (steps 75AKS001 to 75AKS004). If it is determined in step 75AK003 that the received command is a setting change start command (step 75AKS003; Yes), a game stop state start process is executed (step 75AKS005), as in the above-described embodiment. Control for starting notification is performed (step 75AKS006).

  After performing the control in step 75AKS006, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change (step 75AKS007). If the setting change is not to be ended (step 75AKS007; No), unlike the above-described embodiment, a setting change confirmation effect control process is executed (step 75AKS008), and the process returns to step 75AKS007. As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 75AK, the setting change confirmation state is set as the change permission state with the start of power supply by executing the setting change confirmation effect control processing in step 75AKS008. Then, control for executing the confirmation effect can be performed. If it is determined in step 75AKS007 that the setting change is to be ended (step 75AKS007; Yes), control to end the setting change notification is performed (step 75AKS009), and a game stop state end process is executed (step 75AKS010).

  If it is determined in step 75AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command (step 75AKS001; Yes), or after executing the game stop state end processing in step 75AKS010, control to execute initialization notification is performed. (Step 75AKS011), and the power-on command processing ends.

  If it is determined in step 75AKS003 that the received command is a setting confirmation start command (step 75AKS003; Yes), a process corresponding to the setting confirmation state is executed as in the above embodiment (steps 75AKS012 to 75AKS016). ), The power-on command processing ends. As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 75AK, when the setting is changed to the setting change state in response to the start of power supply, the setting change confirmation effect control processing of step 75AKS008 is executed, while the setting change state is set. When it is controlled, the processing corresponding to the setting change confirmation effect control processing is not executed. Therefore, control is performed to enable execution of the confirmation effect in the setting change state, whereas control for enabling execution of the confirmation effect is not performed in the setting confirmation state.

  FIG. 9-52 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the processing executed in step 75AKS008 as the setting change confirmation effect control processing. In the confirmation effect control process during setting confirmation, effect control CPU 120 first determines whether a confirmation effect has been completed (step 75AKS031). In step 75AKS031, for example, when the confirmation effect completion flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 is on, it may be determined that the confirmation effect has been completed. The confirmation effect completion flag may be set to the ON state when the execution of the confirmation effect is completed. If the confirmation effect has been completed in step 75AKS031 (step 75AKS031; Yes), the setting effect confirming effect control process ends.

  When it is determined in step 75AKS031 that the confirmation effect has not been completed (step 75AKS031; No), it is determined whether or not the confirmation effect is being performed (step 75AKS032). At this time, if the confirmation effect is not being performed (Step 75AKS032; No), it is determined whether or not an operation for starting the confirmation effect has been detected (Step 75AKS033). If there is no motion detection in step 75AKS033 (step 75AKS033; No), the setting rendering confirmation effect control process ends. If it is determined in step 75AKS033 that the motion has been detected (step 75AKS033; Yes), the effect control pattern 74AKP01 is read as a setting for starting the execution of the confirmation effect (step 75AKS034), and the confirmation effect process timer is initialized. A value 74AKJ00 is set (step 75AKS035), and an initial confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKD01 is set (step 75AKS036). As described above, in the setting change confirmation effect control process, the determination in step 75AKS033 is performed. Therefore, when the setting change state is set as the change permission state, an arbitrary period such as a confirmation reception period is not provided. When the operation of pressing down the push button 31B is detected at the timing, the confirmation effect condition is satisfied, and the execution of the confirmation effect can be started.

  If it is determined in step 75AKS032 that the confirmation effect is being performed (step 75AKS032; Yes), the confirmation effect process timer is updated (step 75AKS037), and it is determined whether a timeout has occurred (step 75AKS038). ). At this time, if a timeout has occurred (step 75AKS038; Yes), control for ending the confirmation effect is performed (step 75AKS039), and the confirmation effect control process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timeout has not occurred (step 75AKS038; No), it is determined whether the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer matches the determination value (step 75AKS040). If it does not match the determination value (step 75AKS040; No), the confirmation effect control process ends.

  If it is determined in step 75AKS040 that it matches the determination value (step 75AKS040; Yes), an effect using the confirmation effect control data corresponding to the determination value is started (step 75AKS041). In addition, the effect control pattern 74AKP01 is set so that the timer value is determined based on the check effect process timer determination value stored next (step 75AKS042), and the check effect control process is terminated.

  FIG. 9-53 is a timing chart showing a control example of a confirmation effect regarding the characteristic portion 75AK. FIG. 9-53 (A) shows that the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected when the power supply is started by turning on the power, but the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on is not detected. Correspondingly, a case where the setting is not controlled to the change state is shown. FIG. 9-53 (B) shows that when power supply is started by turning on the power, an operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected, and an operation of switching the lock switch 51 on is detected. Corresponds to the case where the state is controlled to the setting change state. FIG. 9-53 (C) shows the control content at each timing.

  When the power is not turned on in the setting change state with the start of power supply at the timing 75AKT01, it is the same as in the case where the setting change state is not controlled in the characteristic unit 74AK, and the RAM clear notification command is received at the timing 74AKT02. Accordingly, the initialization notification is started, and accordingly, the confirmation reception period is started. When the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected at the timing 75AKT03 in the confirmation reception period, the control for executing the confirmation effect is started, and the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01, etc. , A plurality of types of effects, which are first to third confirmation effects, are sequentially executed. Thereafter, at timing 75AKT04, the confirmation effect ends.

  On the other hand, when the power is turned on at the timing 75AKT11 to start the power supply, the setting is controlled at the timing 75AKT12, unlike the case where the setting is controlled at the timing 75AKT12. Upon receiving the start command, it is determined in step 75AKS003 of the power-on command processing that the received command is a setting change start command. As a result, after steps 75AKS005 and 75AKS006, it is determined whether or not the setting change is to be terminated in step 75AKS007. If the setting change is not to be terminated at this time, a setting change confirmation effect control process is executed in step 75AKS008. You. In the confirmation effect control process during the setting change of the characteristic portion 75AK, if it is determined in step 75AKS032 that the confirmation effect is not being performed, it is determined in step 75AKS033 whether a start operation has been detected. In this way, when the setting change state is set as the change permission state, the confirmation effect condition can be satisfied by detecting an operation of pressing the push button 31B. For example, when the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at the timing 75AKT13 in the setting change state, it is determined that the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected in step 75AKS033 of the confirmation effect control process during setting change. Then, the control for executing the confirmation effect such as steps 75AKS034 to 75AKS042 of the confirmation effect control process during the setting change is started. In this way, using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01, a plurality of types of effects to be the first to third confirmation effects are sequentially executed. Thereafter, at timing 75AKT14, the confirmation effect ends.

  After the timing 75AKT14, when the setting change end command transmitted from the main board 11 is received at the timing 75AKT15, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 75AK, it is determined that the setting change is ended in the step 75AKS007. Thus, following steps 75AKS009 and 75AKS010, the control of step 75AKS011 is performed, and the initialization notification is started. When the initialization notification is started, the confirmation effect control process is executed in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process, as in the case of the characteristic portion 74AK, so that the confirmation reception period is started. I just need. Then, when the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected in the confirmation reception period, the control for executing the confirmation effect may be started again.

  As described above, the power-on command processing of the characteristic section 75AK includes the setting change confirmation effect control processing executed in step 75AKS008, and the detection of the start operation is performed in step 75AKS033 of the setting change confirmation effect control processing. When it is determined that there is a confirmation effect condition, the process proceeds to step 74AKS037 and the control for executing the confirmation effect is performed according to establishment of the confirmation effect condition. In this way, when the power supply is started by turning on the power and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state in which the setting value change is permitted, the control for executing the confirmation effect based on the establishment of the confirmation effect condition is performed. Therefore, when the setting change state is set as the change permission state, by enabling the confirmation effect to be performed, it is possible to accurately check the state of the gaming machine and prevent trouble in the operation of checking the state of the gaming machine. Can be prevented.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 75AK, when it is determined in step 75AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the confirmation effect control processing similar to that of the characteristic unit 74AK is executed, and the confirmation is accepted. The period starts. During the confirmation acceptance period, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition. On the other hand, in the confirmation effect control process during setting change, the control for executing the confirmation effect is performed when it is determined in step 75AKS033 that the start operation is detected without providing the confirmation reception period. As a result, the confirmation effect can be executed at any time when the setting is being changed as the change permission condition, so that in order to prevent trouble in checking the state of the gaming machine, the confirmation effect is performed together with the change of the set value. Can be performed properly.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 75AK, the control in steps 75AKS005 to 75AKS011 is performed in accordance with the setting change state. Thereafter, the confirmation effect control process similar to that of the characteristic unit 74AK is executed, so that the confirmation reception period is started. In this way, after the setting change state as the change permission state ends, the control for executing the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation reception period is performed, so that the operation of checking the state of the gaming machine is hindered. In order to prevent such a situation, the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed.

   The push button 31B and the push sensor 35B are configured to detect an operation such as a pressing operation by a player. For example, in the confirmation effect control process during the setting change of the characteristic portion 75AK, it is determined in step 75AKS033 that the start operation has been detected, so that the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. In addition, by executing the same confirmation effect control process as that of the characteristic portion 74AK, it is determined in step 74AKS036 that the start operation has been detected, so that the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. This makes it possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect when preventing the operation of checking the state of the gaming machine from being hindered.

(Explanation of the means relating to the characteristic portion 75AK)
Regarding the above-described characteristic portion 75AK, a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different degrees of advantage for the player is described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine for performing control for outputting a confirmation sound, there is one described in, for example, JP-A-2016-220833. However, in the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-220833, no consideration has been given to the case where the setting change and the confirmation effect compete. Therefore, there is a possibility that the operation of checking the state of the gaming machine may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 75AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing a trouble in checking the state of the gaming machine,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of performing a game and being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage for the player is different based on the set value;
Setting control means (for example, CPU 103 for executing the processing of steps Sa6 and Sa12) capable of controlling a change permission state for permitting the setting value to be changed by the setting means with the start of power supply;
Effect means (eg, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of executing effects,
After the power supply is started, the confirmation control means (for example, the confirmation effect control processing in step 74AKS018, the confirmation effect control during setting change in step 75AKS008) capable of executing the confirmation effect control by the effect means based on the establishment of the confirmation effect condition. Effect control CPU 120 for executing the processing).
The confirmation control means,
When the control is not controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect in accordance with establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation reception period (for example, execution of the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018). ),
When the change is permitted, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect in accordance with the establishment of the confirmation effect condition (for example, execution of a setting effect confirmation control process during setting change in step 75AKS008).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to such a configuration, the confirmation effect can be executed when the change is permitted, so that it is possible to accurately check the state of the gaming machine and prevent trouble in checking the state of the gaming machine. .

As a gaming machine of the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 75AK,
The confirmation control means,
When initialization is performed without being controlled to the change permission state along with the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect in accordance with establishment of the confirmation effect condition in a confirmation reception period (for example, step 74AKS033). , Running 74AKS036),
When the change is permitted, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition without providing a confirmation reception period (for example, execution of step 75AKS033).
It may be a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 75AK.
In such a configuration, the confirmation effect is appropriately executed together with the change of the set value, so that it is possible to prevent a trouble in the operation of confirming the state of the gaming machine.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 according to the characteristic portion 75AK,
The confirmation control means performs control for executing the confirmation effect in accordance with satisfaction of the confirmation effect condition during a confirmation acceptance period after the change permission state ends (for example, steps after execution of steps 75AKS005 to 75AKS011). 74AKS018),
The game machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 75AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the operation of confirming the state of the gaming machine from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic portion 75AK,
Game detecting means (for example, a push button 31B, a push sensor 35B, etc.) capable of detecting an action by a player,
The confirmation effect condition is satisfied based on the detection of the operation by the game detecting means (for example, execution of step 75AKS033).
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 3 relating to the characteristic portion 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the operation of confirming the state of the gaming machine from being hindered.

(Explanation of means common to characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK)
As a gaming machine of the means A according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK,
Setting detecting means (for example, a lock switch 51 or the like) capable of detecting an operation related to setting;
Initialization detecting means (for example, a clear switch AK001 or the like) capable of detecting an operation related to initialization of the gaming machine;
Setting confirmation control means capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state based on the detection of the operation by the setting detection means upon the start of power supply (for example, CPU 103 executing steps AKS001 and AKS002);
A change permission control means capable of controlling to the change permission state based on the detection of the operation by the initialization detection means upon the start of power supply (for example, the CPU 103 executing steps Sa6 and Sa13);
A gaming machine according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately control the setting confirmation state and the change permission state, and to appropriately set the setting values.

As a gaming machine of the means B relating to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK,
Setting detecting means (for example, a lock switch 51 or the like) capable of detecting an operation related to setting;
Initialization detecting means (for example, a clear switch AK001 or the like) capable of detecting an operation related to initialization;
When the operation is not detected by the setting detecting means and the operation is detected by the initialization detecting means with the start of the power supply, the initialization notification is executed at the same time as the power supply is started, while the power supply is started. Accordingly, when an operation is detected by the setting detection unit, the initialization notification unit executes the initialization notification after the operation is no longer detected (for example, for an effect control unit that executes a power-on command process in step AKS012). CPU 120).
A gaming machine according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the initialization notification and to appropriately set the setting values.

As a gaming machine of the means C according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK,
Information display means (for example, a display monitor 29) capable of displaying information relating to a game value given based on a game medium entering a predetermined area;
The information display means can display a set value set by the setting means (for example, a display by the first display unit 29A).
A gaming machine according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately set the setting values without separately providing a configuration for displaying the setting values.

As a gaming machine of the means D relating to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK,
Effect detection means (for example, an output amount changeover switch 71AK001 or the like) capable of detecting an operation relating to the output amount of the effect;
A display control unit (for example, an effect control CPU 120 executing step AKS026) for displaying a display relating to the set value by the setting unit prior to a display relating to the output amount of the effect;
A gaming machine according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK may be used.
In such a configuration, the display relating to the set value is appropriately performed, and it is possible to prevent the trouble in the work of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means E according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK,
Effect control means for controlling the execution of the effect based on information from the game control means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing AKS015 command analysis processing);
The effect control means, when in the change permission state, information restriction means for restricting control based on information different from notification information for notifying the end of the change permission state (for example, effect control CPU 120 executing AKS027 or the like) ) And
A gaming machine according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem and to appropriately set the set value.

(Explanation related to association of features)
Each configuration related to the feature units 71AK to 75AK, 98AK, and 99AK may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration related to other feature units. The features combined in this way, or individual features not combined, may be combined as appropriate with some or all of the configurations for other features. For example, regarding the characteristic unit 71AK, the configuration of the effect control CPU 120 that executes the start-time output switching process in step 71AKS013 of the effect control main process, and the short initial operation in step 72AK007 of the power-on command process regarding the characteristic unit 72AK. With respect to the configuration of the effect control CPU 120 that performs the control to be executed, and regarding the characteristic portion 73AK, the effect control for executing the short initial operation is not performed until it is determined that the setting change is completed in step 73AKS007 of the power-on command processing. Concerning the configuration of the CPU 120 and the characteristic portion 74AK, in the step 74AKS018 of the production control main process, the configuration of the production control CPU 120 for executing the confirmation production control process, and the characteristic portion 75AK, in step 75AKS008 of the power-on command processing Regarding the configuration and the characteristic portion 98AK of the effect control CPU 120 which executes the confirmation effect control process during the constant change, regarding the configuration and the characteristic portion 99AK of the effect control CPU 120 which sets the air volume corresponding to the volume in the process of step 98AKS003, the steps 99AKS003 and The configuration in which different determinations are made in steps 99AKS013 and 99AKS015 may be a combination of some or all of them as appropriate.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko gaming machine 11 ... Main board 12 ... Effect control board 51 ... Lock switch 100 ... Game control microcomputer 120 ... Effect control CPU
AK001 ... clear switch 71AK001 ... output amount changeover switch 72AKP01 ... short initial control pattern 72AKP02 ... long initial control pattern 74AKP01 ... effect control pattern 98AK001 ... first air outlet 98AK002 ... second air outlet 99AK001 ... second movable body 99 second movable body 99 body

Claims (2)

A gaming machine capable of playing games,
The volume of at least the specific effect, a sound volume setting means capable of setting the volume of the plurality of stages including the greater than the first volume and the first volume second volume,
An air outlet through which wind is output ,
As the blow port, there is a first blow port and a second blow port provided at a position different from the first blow port,
Wind is output from the first blower port at a predetermined air volume at any volume among a plurality of levels of volume set by the volume setting means,
A gaming machine wherein the wind is output from the second air outlet at a different air volume when the specific effect is executed at the first volume and when the specific effect is executed at the second volume. .   Effect execution means capable of executing at least the specific effect,
  Operating means operable by a player,
  The effect execution means can execute an operation effect to operate the operation means during execution of the specific effect,
  When performing the operation effect, it is possible to output a wind from the first air outlet so as to hit a player operating the operation means.
  The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein:

Images